G-W

Goodheart-Willcox Publisher

Fifth Edition

el A. Barsamian
 Fifth Edition

by

Michael A. Barsamian
Richard A. Cizelbach

Publisher
Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.
Tinley Park, Illinois
www.g-w.com
 Copyright © 2013
by
The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.

Previous editions copyright 2001,1996,1993,1986

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, stored, or transmitted in any
form or by any electronic or mechanical means, including information storage and retrieval
systems, without the prior written permission of The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.

Manufactured in the United States of America.

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 2012050525

ISBN 978-1-61960-195-6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - 13 - 18 17 16 15 14 13

The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc. Brand Disclaimer: Brand names, company names, and illustrations for
products and services included in this text are provided for educational purposes only and do not represent or imply
endorsement or recommendation by the author or the publisher.
The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc. Safety Notice: The reader is expressly advised to carefully read, understand,
and apply all safety precautions and warnings described in this book or that might also be indicated in undertaking the
activities and exercises described herein to minimize risk of personal injury or injury to others. Common sense and good
judgment should also be exercised and applied to help avoid all potential hazards. The reader should always refer to the
appropriate manufacturer 's technical information, directions, and recommendations; then proceed with care to follow
specific equipment operating instructions. The reader should understand these notices and cautions are not exhaustive.
The publisher makes no warranty or representation whatsoever, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to
equipment, procedures, and applications described or referred to herein, their quality, performance, merchantability, or
fitness for a particular purpose. The publisher assumes no responsibility for any changes, errors, or omissions in this book.
The publisher specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever, including any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, special,
or exemplary damages resulting, in whole or in part, from the reader's use or reliance upon the information, instructions,
procedures, warnings, cautions, applications, or other matter contained in this book. The publisher assumes no responsibility
for the activities of the reader.
The Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc. Internet Disclaimer: The Internet resources and listings in this Goodheart-
Willcox Publisher product are provided solely as a convenience to you. These resources and listings were reviewed at
the time of publication to provide you with accurate, safe, and appropriate information. Goodheart-Willcox Publisher
has no control over the referenced websites and, due to the dynamic nature of the Internet, is not responSible or liable
for the content, products, or performance of links to other websites or resources. Goodheart-Willcox Publisher makes no
representation, either expressed or implied, regarding the content of these web sites, and such references do not constitute
an endorsement or recommendation of the information or content presented. It is your responSibility to take all protective
measures to guard against inappropriate content, viruses, or other destructive elements.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Barsamian, Michael Allen.
Machine trades print reading / Michael Barsamian, Richard
Gizelbach.
pages cm
Includes index.
ISBN 978-1-61960-195-6
1. Blueprints. 2. Machinery--Drawings. I. Gizelbach, Richard. II.
Title.
T379.B3552013
604.2'5--dc23
2012050525
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
UNIT 1
Visualizing Shapes ................................... 5

UNIT 2
Line Usage ......................................... 16

UNIT 3
Title Blocks and Notes ............................... 29

UNIT 4
Dimensions and Tolerances ........................... 39

UNIT 5
Working Drawings ................................... 50

UNIT 6
Holes .............................................. 64
UNIT7
Threads ............................................ 76
UNIT 8
Contou rs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
UNIT 9
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
UNIT 10
Angles ............................................ 128
UNIT 11
Machining Details .................................. 144
UNIT 12
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing .............. 166
UNIT 13
Print Reading Review ............................... 203

Reference Section .................................. 226

Glossary .......................................... 233
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
3
 INTRODUCTION
Machine Trades Print Reading allows you to develop the basic skills required for
visualizing and interpreting industrial prints. Each unit begins with outcome-based
objectives you will achieve upon satisfactory completion of the unit. The objectives
describe the knowledge, skills, and attitudes required for reading and understanding
drawings in the machine trades industry.
A heavy emphasis is on the use of illustrations to develop the basic skills of
visualization and to simplify the learning process. Actual industrial prints prepare you for
the real conditions found in a machine shop. Some of the industrial prints have certain
changes or modifications from the original drawings to provide a variety of information
that will aid your learning experiences.
The text consists of 13 units. The first four units give you the basics of print reading.
They present the important concepts of visualizing shapes, line usage on drawings,
basic title block format, dimensions, and tolerances. New content is included for
dimensions, tolerances, and orthographic projections. Additional illustrations reinforce
instruction and develop student skills.
Units 5 through 12 deal with industrial prints. Each unit introduces specific technical
topics about mechanical drawings and then shows how they relate to actual prints.
Metric units are minimally covered. Metric units, however, do not affect the manner
of reading prints but simply reflect mathematical conversions. A unit on Geometric
Tolerancing is included due to the large number of industrial firms using this symbolism
in describing machining procedures.
The instructional materials, illustrations, and industrial prints in Machine Trades Print
Reading appear in a systematic sequence. Each unit's written material and illustrations
contain the technical information needed to complete the industrial print reading
questions. Each succeeding unit adds new information about the print reading process.
The drawing quizzes at the end of each unit test your print reading knowledge and skills.
Unit 13 is a collection of prints with quiz questions that review all of the material
presented in the text. The reference section and a glossary of terms are included for
your use throughout the course. They will also serve as a reference source after you
have completed this course.

Michael Barsamian
Richard Gizelbach

4
 Unit
1
.~, > , .... ". '~'."""
I •
After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o List the six principal views of an object.
o Understand the basic principles of orthographic
projection.
o Identify first- and third-angle projection drawings.
o Visualize three-dimensional objects from
orthographic drawings.
o Apply proper dimensioning for projected views.
o Draw a missing view of an object from two given
views.
The ability to read and understand prints and
technical drawings is an essential skill required
in the engineering and manufacturing fields. The
key factor in print reading is the ability to visualize
separate views of an object on paper.
MULTIVIEW DRAWING
Manufacturing industries use multiview drawings
as a way to visualize and describe a part or assembly.
Understanding a multiview drawing is an important
aspect of reading prints and technical drawings.
In MULTIVIEW DRAWINGS, two or more views
represent the accurate shape of an object or part. A
multiview drawing provides a means of visualizing
a three-dimensional shape on a two-dimensional
surface such as drafting paper or computer screen.
All the necessary details of a part's shape and
size are included in a multiview drawing to ensure
accurate production of the part.
Orthographic projection is one method used to
develop multiview drawings. ORTHOGRAPHIC
PROJECTION is a way of showing the shape of
- an object by projecting two or more views at right
angles to each other. The views are aligned perpen-
dicular to one another by the means of projectors.
PROJECTORS are parallel lines of sight placed
perpendicular to the views. See Fig. 1-1. The terms
"multiview drawings" and "orthographic projection
drawings" are often used interchangeably.
5
TOP
ogo PERPENDICULAR
PROJECTORS
I I
D_tJ
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE
Fig 1-1. A simple multiview drawing is created by orthographic
projection. Three separate views are projected at right angles
to each other.
At first glance, the idea of three-dimensional
visualization seems difficult to grasp. Multiview
drawings, however, will become easierto understand
as your visualization skills improve. The following
explanations, figures, and lessons will help improve
your print reading skills.
VIEWS IN A GLASS BOX
In conceptual drawing, two viewing planes-a
horizontal plane and a vertical plane-intersect to
create quadrants. See Fig. 1-2, A. Each quadrant
represents a different viewing angle-first-, second-,
third-, and fourth-angles. The viewing angle deter-
mines how the views of an object are projected.
Only the first- and third-angles are used for draw-
ings because the second- and fourth-angles repeat
the same information. The majority of the drawings
in this book are third-angle projections.
The United States and Canada primarily use
third-angle projections for multiview drawings.
A drawing viewed and projected from the third
quadrant is a THIRD-ANGLE PROJECTION . With
third-angle projection, the viewer is looking toward
 Machine Trades Print Reading

the desired view of an object. A viewing plane is
located between the viewer and the object. The
desired view is transferred onto the viewing plane
in front of the viewer. The shape of the object
determines how it is shown in a view.
To explore third-angle projection further, imagine
an object placed in a glass box. Each of the box's
six sides represents a viewing plane. Projectors
extend the views from the object to the flat surfaces
of the glass box. This produces six principal views
of the object-top, bottom, front, rear, right side,
and left side views. In multiview drawings, however,
only three primary views are typically used-top,
front, and right views. Fig. 1-2, B shows the three
primary views projected in the third-angle. Note how
the projectors transfer each view to their respective
glass surface. On a drawing, the third-angle symbol
indicates a third-angle projection, as shown in
Fig. 1-2, C.
In Fig. 1-3, the surfaces of the box are unfolded
to show the six principal views. Visualize, then, the
unfolding of the glass box:
1. The front surface remains stationary.
2. The other surfaces hinge and rotate toward the
front viewing surface.
As the six surfaces are unfolded, the projected
views of the top, front, and right side become flat,
like a sheet of drafting paper, as shown in Fig. 1-4.
First-angle projection is the drawing standard
used in many International countries. A drawing
viewed and projected from the first quadrant is a
FIRST-ANGLE PROJECTION. See Fig. 1-5, A.
With first-angle projection, the object is between the
viewer and the viewing plane. The viewer transmits
the views onto the viewing plane located to the
opposite side of the object. See Fig. 1-5, B. On a
drawing, a first-angle symbol indicates a first-angle
projection, as shown in Fig. 1-5, C.

<

Fig 1-2. Visualizing an object in third-angle projection . A-Viewing planes divided into four quadrants with the third quadrant
highlighted. 8-An object in a glass box showing third-angle projection . The three primary views project toward the glass
surfaces. C-This symbol indicates a third-angle projection.

6
 ----- Visualizing Shapes

~- -

Fig 1-3. The front view surface remains stationary, while the other five view surfaces unfold.

r THIRD-ANGLE PROJECTION
SYMBOL

~
Fig 1-4. Six principal view surfaces of a third-angle drawing are flattened, like a two-dimensional drawing.
7
 Machine Trades Print Reading

c
Fig 1-5. Visualizing an object in first-angle projection. A-Viewing planes divided into four quadrants with the first quadrant
highlighted. 8-An object in a glass box showing first-angle projection . The three primary views project to the opposite
sides of the glass surfaces. C-This symbol indicates a first-angle projection .

Like third-angle projection, the front view is
stationary, but the surfaces are unfolded away from
the front view and flattened to show six principal
views. See Fig. 1-6. Compare Fig. 1-3 to Fig. 1-6.
Notice that all the views except for the front view are
reversed from each other. The front view is the only
common view between the two types of projections.
Therefore, the first-angle projections are as follows :
1. Top view projects to the bottom of the box.
2. Bottom view projects to the top of the box.
3. Front view projects to the back of the box.
4. Rear view projects to the front of the box.
5. Right side view projects to the left side of the
box.
6. Left side view projects to the right side of the
box.
As the global market expands, print readers ,
assemblers, machinists, and fabricators are expe-
riencing more first-angle projection drawings. Both
8
methods of projection are acceptable in modern
drawings. However, caution should be taken
when drafting and reading drawings. The drafter
or designer should never mix different projection
methods, which can lead to confusion . It is equally
important for the reader to recognize the two types
of projections in order to interpret details correctly.
Understanding the basic principles of projection
will allow you to identify the contours and lines that
define a part.
ARRANGEMENT OF VIEWS
Carefully study the top view in Fig. 1-4, which is
directly above and aligned with the front view by
projectors. The right side view also has a direct
relationship to the front view through projected lines.
As stated earlier, the standard layout of views is
the top, front, and right side. In the design industry,
 Visualizing Shapes

r
-EJ$
FIRST·ANGLE PROJECTION
SYMBOL

Fig 1-6. Six principal view surfaces of a first-angle drawing are flattened , like a two-dimensional drawing.

however, there are exceptions. Although the right

side view is preferred, using the left side view is
acceptable if it describes the object more clearly.
Another exception occurs if the left side has fewer
obstructing lines than the right side.
Fig. 1-7 shows the standard layout of top, front,
and right side views for a third-angle projection ,
along with their basic dimensions. Fig. 1-8 shows
the standard layout of top, front, and left side views
for a first-angle projection. LENGTH
~ . WIDTH. I I
BASIC DIMENSIONS

~ :
I I-

The top view contains the length and width of the I I

C)

~--
_ W
part. The front view shows the length and height. I

-- ~
The right side view gives the height and width.
Note that each view contains only two required
dimensions of the object.
In most cases, any single view of a part does FRONT RIGHT SIDE
not have sufficient information to describe the total
size of the part. However, the missing view can
be determined when any two of the three primary
views-top, front, or right side-are given. Refer
to Fig. 1-6 and carefully study the dimensions for Fig 1-7. Standard third-angle , multiview drawing layout.
each view. Top-Length and width . Front-Length and height.
Right side-Height and width .

9
 Machine Trades Print Reading

FRONT LEFT SIDE

I I I

F--1--=~
:[[]:
L: __ =J TOP
iG$
t=ig
H~. Standard first-angle, multiview drawing layout. Fig 1-9. Projecting the image to show the front view including
Top-Length and width . Front-Length and height. the basic dimensions needed to describe the surface.
Left side-Height and width .

SURFACE REPRESENTATION

Each view contains two basic measurements

needed to complete the part. These two
measurements are the basis for developing an
individual surface. Fig. 1-9, for example, is a
pictorial drawing of an object with front view A
projected. A PICTORIAL DRAWING is a three-
dimensional drawing of an object. In Fig. 1-9, the
front projected surface A has measurements for
true size and shape. Any surface that is parallel to
a viewing plane is drawn to true size and shape.
TRUE SIZE
TRUE SIZE AND SHAPE is the actual "real, not AND SHAPE
scaled" measurement and outline of an object. Note OF SURFACE B FORSHORTENED
SURFACE C
that projected surface A is identical to front view A
on the pictorial drawing of the object.
In Fig. 1-10, the top view represents surface C
differently than the front view. The pictorial drawing
shows surface C as angular, while the projected
surface C looks rectangular. Any surface that is
neither parallel nor perpendicular to a projected
view is foreshortened. FORESHORTENING is
reducing the depth of a surface to give it the illusion
of projection. The process of projection foreshortens
the angular surface as viewed from the top. The Fig 1-10. In projecting a top view, the angular surface C is
projected width and length of the object are true foreshortened .
size and shape.
A similar procedure is used in Fig. 1-11 to obtain parallel to the projection plane, it is foreshortened.
the right side view. This view shows surfaces D Also, the height and width of the right side surface
and E in true size and shape as projected from the do not change as they are projected. Fig. 1-7 shows
pictorial drawing. Since angular surface C is not the completed view in the standard layout.
10
 Visualizing Shapes

FOR SHORTENED
SURFACE C

Fig 1-11. The projected right side view also shows the
foreshortened angular surface C.

VISUALIZING BASIC SHAPES

Multiview drawings can be complex. You must

understand the procedures for obtaining top, front,
and right side views before attempting to read
complicated drawings. Pay particular attention to
Fig 1-12. Pictorial view of a basic L-shaped object is presented
the various forms or surfaces created by projections for ease of understanding visualization .
and their respective views.
It is important to be able to visualize and
understand the basic shape of objects before
reading other reference material on the print. If
you do not understand the objects shown, you
will not understand the reference material. A
j j
r--- ----------------~

misunderstanding can cause costly mistakes in the

manufacturing process.
f-
:r:
(:)
A MULTIVIEW APPLICATION w
:r:
By applying the procedures of orthographic •
projection to the L-shaped object shown in Fig. 1-12,
you will create a multiview drawing. First, rotate the ..
LENGTH
object into the front view position (in the same flat
plane as paper). Note, as the front view is drawn,
the width is not seen. See Fig. 1-13.
I- -I
Fig 1-13. An L-shaped object projected onto a front view.

PROJECTING THE VIEWS

Next, extend the projectors toward the top and
right side view positions. Extend the projectors as
far as needed between each view. Then, locate the
top view and right side views by transferring the
width dimension. Use a 45° miter angle to transfer
the width from top to right side view, as shown in
Fig. 1-14.
In many instances, simple objects may have
identical top and right side views, but have different
front views. See Fig. 1-15.
This unit covered the basic method of visualizing
a multiview drawing. The drawing problems on the
following pages allow you to practice your skills
while increasing your understanding of multiview
drawings.

11
 Machine Trades Print Reading

MITER ANGLE OF 45

TOP

:r:
f-
o
3:

PROJECTORS

STARTING POINT
w
U
<t:
D--
(f)

f-
:r:
C)
w
.. :r:

...
I-
LENGTH . 1. SPACE -I
FRONT RIGHT SIDE
Fig 1-14. When front and top views are drawn , use extenders and a miter angle to transfer the width dimension to the right side view.

TOP TOP

[J [J
tt tt

~ FRONT
- [Sj -
FRONT
A B
Fig 1-15. Interchangeable surfaces on simple objects use the same top and right side
views . On ly the front views reveal the difference.

12
 Visualizing Shapes

Drawing Problems

Complete the missing view in each problem. Use a ruler, machinist's scale, or other straightedge. Label
each view: top, front, and right side.

Drawing Problems 1 and 2. Draw the missing views in the spaces provided .

13
 Machine Trades Print Reading

Drawing Problems 3 and 4. Draw the missing views in the spaces provided.

14
 Visualizing Shapes

Drawing Problems 5 and 6. Draw the missing views in the spaces provided .

15
 -
, ¢

,. • A

~~
Unit t
" <

:klcN'E USAGE I
.J
-
< ,

2 1
1-"-
•• 1
;*::"") tr ~i
[ t
j

After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o Describe the purposes of lines on prints.
o Identify various types of lines found on prints.
o Locate corresponding lines or surfaces in
various views.
visible in a view. Visible lines define the outside
border of a part as well as the surfaces within the
borders. Visible lines are thick continuous lines that
visually stand out on a drawing. See Fig. 2-1 .

As new ideas develop into useful products, they

~---"------r--
require precise drawings to parts. Drawings must be VISIBLE LINES

consistent so they are readable across the industry.

The American Society of Mechanical Engi-
neers (ASME) develops drawing standards used
by the industry for the development of engineer-
ing drawings. DRAWING STANDARDS are docu-
mented practices used to develop drawings. One
Fig. 2-1 . Visible lines outline all edges and surfaces of an
of the standards is "Line Conventions and Letter-
object seen in a view.
ing-ASME Y14.2M-1992". This standard, also
referred to as the ALPHABET OF LINES, includes
guidelines for specific types of lines, each with an
HIDDEN LINES
intended purpose.

TYPES OF LINES HIDDEN LINES show edges or surfaces that are

not visible when viewing a part. A hidden line, as
Drawings contain various types of lines. shown in Fig. 2-2, is a series of thin line dashes
Understanding the alphabet of lines allows the that are evenly spaced. The spaces between the
reader to visualize the intent of a drawing. dashes are short.
A line can have different characteristics. A line
can be continuous (solid with no breaks), or dashed
(short lines separated by spaces), or a combination
of both. Each type has a specific meaning.
Line width, or line weight, is another characteristic
of a line. There are two line widths used in
mechanical drawing. A thick line is twice the width
I
of a thin line. The difference between the two helps
identify their purpose. In the following sections, you
will learn about the different types of lines and their
importance in use. I
VISIBLE LINES
HIDDEN LINES
VISIBLE LINES, also referred to as object lines
or outlines, define the shape and surfaces of an Fig. 2-2. Hidden lines show edges and surfaces not seen
object. They show all edges of an object that are in a view.

16
 Line Usage

SECTION LINES INDICATE CUT AREA

CENTERLINES

A CENTERLINE shows the location of the center

point of a hole or an axis of a part. A centerline also
may show the center of an arc or a path of motion.
Centerlines are thin lines with alternating long and
single, short dashes. See Fig. 2-3. Centerlines are
critical to the machinist during layout, machining,
and inspection.
UNCUT AREAS

CENTER MARK INDICATES CENTER OF HOLE

Fig. 2-4. Section lines indicate a cut view of a part.

dimension lines, leader lines, and numerical values.

See Fig. 2-5. Together, they use solid, thin lines
and arrowheads to represent the distance between
CENTERLINE
two points. EXTENSION LINES extend away from
the corners or surfaces of the part to indicate the
Fig. 2-3. Centerlines indicate center locations of holes, arcs, points of measurement. A DIMENSION LINE
and axes of symmetrical parts. spans the distance between the extension lines
with arrowheads and a number value. The number
value represents the distance between the points of
SYMMETRY LINES measurement.

A SYMMETRY LINE, common in partial views

LL
and sections, shows the center axis of a part where
both sides are symmetrical-the same shape and
size. It has a centerline with two short thick, parallel DIMENSION LINE
lines placed perpendicular at both ends.
NUMBER VALUE / L.......-_-I
SECTION LINES

A SECTION is a "cut away" view of a part that

shows the hidden interior details of a primary
view. SECTION LINES indicate the cut surfaces
of a sectional drawing. Section lines are evenly
spaced, thin diagonal lines, as shown in Fig. 2-4.
If a section cuts through two or more parts, then
the section lines for the additional parts change
direction. In addition, different types of section lines
identify various types of material. See Unit 9-
Sectional Views for information on sectional lines
and sectional views.
EXTENSION AND DIMENSION LINES
DIMENSIONING is a method of representing
measurement on a drawing using extension lines,
EXTENSION LINES
Fig. 2-5. Extension and dimension lines specify the size of an
object.
LEADER LINES
A LEADER LINE directs the reader to notes,
symbols, item numbers, part numbers, dimensions,
or specific operations vital to the machining process.
The leader line couples a thin angular (slanted) line
with an arrowhead. See Fig. 2-6.

17
 Machine Trades Print Reading

M4 X 10 DEE P PHANTOM LINES

(6X) ON 038 BOLT
PHANTOM LINES indicate movement of parts,
CIRC LE
~ SPECIFIC NOTE
repeated details, or extra material on a part before
the machining process. See Fig. 2-8. They also
show filleted and rounded corners on a part.
SLANTED LINE
Phantom lines are thin lines made up of one long
Fig . 2-6. A leader line calls out specific information for the line followed by two short dashes. Phantom lines
referenced part. always start and end with a long line.

CUTTING-PLANE LINES BREAK LINES

CUTTING-PLANE LINES indicate the location of BREAK LINES indicate a removed area on
a cutting path along a plane, as well as the viewing a drawing when it is not necessary to show the
direction for sectional and removed views. A cutting- complete view. Typically, long parts will not fit on a
plane line is a thick line with oversized arrows, as drawing. Long break lines indicate the shortening of
shown in Fig. 2-7. a long part with uniform shape, often with repeating
features. Long breaks use thin straight lines with
zigzags, as shown in Fig. 2-9.
CUTIING-PLANE LINE
Sectional views often use short break lines to
provide clearer detail in viewing the part or parts
VIEWING that lie directly below the removed part. Short
DIRECTION - --
breaks use thick, freehand lines. Refer to Fig. 2-9.
'r- Cylindrical and tubular objects call for curved
I
AREA I
).-
break lines. There are two types of curved break
REMOVED
FROM
/
lines-one for solid objects and one for tubular
VIEW objects. Refer to Fig . 2-9.

LINE IDENTIFICATION ON A PRINT

SECTION A-A Fig. 2-10 shows the application of the alphabet of

A B lines on a two-view drawing. The drawing displays
several linetypes as described in this unit.
Fig. 2-7. A cutting-plane line indicates the location and view of
the section. A-Arrows indicate the viewing direction , while
the cutting-plane line slices through the part. B-The area
to the left of the cutting-plane line is removed , while the
area to the right is rotated to a front view.

~ PHANTOM LINES

A c
Fig. 2-8. Applications of phantom lines. A-Phantom lines indicating motion. B-Phantom lines signifying repeated details.
C-Phantom lines showing extra material before machining.

18
 Line Usage

LONG
~ __________\~ /)4 -________~

1-------;( !"<------------I
~ _________J) ~ ____________~
~

SHORT

SOLID

TUBULAR
Fig. 2-9. Different types of break lines.

OBJECT LINE

HIDDEN LINE

CUTIING-PLANE LINE

SECTION LINES
4 HOLE S
1 - - - - - - LEADER

r
CENTER LINE

~~

~--- X- ----.----il-l

EXTENSION LINE

DIMENSION LINE
FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW
Fig. 2-10. Typical usage of standard lines on a mechanical drawing.

19
 Machine Trades Print Reading

LINE AND SURFACE IDENTIFICATION

Given pictorial drawings with marked surfaces , identify the corresponding lines and surfaces on the top,
front, and right side views. Below is a completed example. Review it before completing the Line and Surface
Identification quizzes.

PICTORIA L
DRAWING

1 7

SURFACE TOP FRONT R.SIDE

A 4 14 21

B 3 10 20

C 2 9 17

D 5 12 15

E 1 8 19

F 7 11 18

G 6 13 16

Fig. 2-11 Sample problem and answer grid.

20
 Line Usage

LINE AND SURFACE IDENTIFICATION QUIZ-A

Refer to Fig. 2-12. Place the correct number in the space provided on the answer grid to identify the
corresponding lines and surfaces on pictorial drawings.

23

TOP

SURFACE

18
FRONT R. SIDE

SURFACE TOP FRONT R. SIDE

A
B
C
D
E

F
G
H
I
J
K

Fig. 2-12. Quiz A problem and answer grid.

21
 Machine Trades Print Reading

LINE AND SURFACE IDENTIFICATION QUIZ-B

Refer to Fig. 2-13. Place the correct number in the space provided on the answer grid to identify the
corresponding lines and surfaces on pictorial drawings.

46

19 26
22 23 24

28 ~ ~
~9 SURFACE

TOP

FRONT R. SIDE

SURFACE TOP FRONT R. SIDE SURFACE TOP FRONT R. SIDE

A I
B J
C K
0 L
E M
F N
G 0
H P

Fig. 2-13. Quiz B problem and answer grid.

22
 6
I
11 1

36 2
L@- -
3 ;35 ~7
8\ 1
__L~ O 4

5 "-- 34
X ------<
F

N
W
r 9 X 1 / ~ C
:::::I
CI)

C
IJ)
II)
(Q
CI)

13 33

14 ____ ______ L18 x

29

- ---- ~~ --

. X
24

15 ~ x __l__ x ~ 27
Fig. 2-14. Vee Block.
 Machine Trades Print Reading

VEE BLOCK QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 2-14. Study the drawings and familiarize yourself with the shapes of the objects. Next, follow
the visible lines, hidden lines, and centerlines from view to view. Then answer the questions for each of
the views.

1. Line 25 in the side view is what line in the top view? 1.

2. How many surfaces are shown in the top view? 2.

3. Line 33 in the side view is what line in the top view? 3.

4. Line 18 in the front view is what surface in the top view? 4.

5. What type of line is line@? 5.

6. Surface 4 in the top view is what line in the side view? 6.

7. Line 16 in the front view is what line in the side view? 7.

8. Surface 22 in the side view is what line in the top view? 8.

9. Surface 22 in the side view is what line in the front view? 9.

10. Line 20 in the side view is what surface in the top view? 10.

11. Line 27 in the side view is what line in the front view? 11.

12. What type of line is line@? 12.

13. Surface 5 in the top view is what line in the side view? 13.

14. Line 23 in the side view is what surface in the top view? 14.

15. Line 10 in the top view is what line in the side view? 15.

16. Surface 1 in the top view is what line in the side view? 16.

17. What type of line is line@? 17.

18. Line 21 in the side view is what line in the top view? 18.

19. Line 14 in the front view is what line in the top view? 19.

20. Line 35 in the top view is what line in the side view? 20.

21. Line 29 in the side view is what line in the top view? 21.

22 . What type of line is line@? 22.

23. What type of line is line@? 23.

24. Surface 1 in the top view is what line in the front view? 24.

25. What type of line is line®? 25.

24
 26

9
32 39 18
31 34

c:
~
en
N
U1 C
1/1
II)
(Q
en

20 14 29
37 4
12

II
·[,9 A

22 36
~8
5 16
Fig. 2-15. Adjusting Bracket.
 Machine Trades Print Reading

ADJUSTING BRACKET QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 2-15. Study the drawings and familiarize yourself with the shapes of the objects. Next, follow
the visible lines, hidden lines, and centerlines from view to view. Then answer the questions for each of the
views.

1. Line 7 in the front view is what surface in the top view? 1.

2. Line 4 in the side view is what line in the top view? 2.

3. Surface 1 in the top view is what line in the side view? 3.

4. Line 29 in the side view is what surface in the top view? 4.

5. Surface 1 in the top view is what line in the front view? 5.

6. Line 9 in the top view is what line in the front view? 6.

7. Surface 6 in the side view is what line in the front view? 7.

8. Surface 6 in the side view is what line in the top view? 8.

9. Line 24 in the front view is what line in the top view? 9.

10. What kind of line is line ©? 10.

11 . Surface 3 in the front view is shown as what lines in the 11.

top view?

12. Line 13 in the top view is what line in the front view? 12.

13. Surface 12 in the side view is what line in the top view? 13.

14. Line 18 in the top view is what line in the side view? 14.

15. What kind of line is line@? 15.

16. Line 20 in the front view is what surface in the top view? 16.

17. Surface 27 in the top view is what line in the front view? 17.

18. Line 38 in the front view is what line in the top view? 18.

19. Line 20 in the front view is what line in the side view? 19.

20. Line 22 in the front view is what line in the top view? 20.

21. What kind of line is line@? 21.

22. Line 5 in the front view is what line in the side view? 22.

23. Line 33 in the front view is what line in the top view? 23.

24. What kind of line is line@? 24.

25. Surface 2 in the top view is what line in the side view? 25.
26
 31
46 19
48
V I

17
21
30 5

12 1
34
 Machine Trades Print Reading

CLEVIS BRACKET QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 2-16. Study the drawings and familiarize yourself with the shapes of the objects. Next, follow
the visible lines, hidden lines, and centerlines from view to view. Then answer the questions for each of the
views.

1. Surface 1 is denoted by what line in the side view? 1.

2. Line 18 in the top view is represented by what line in the 2.
side view?
3. Surface 7 is represented by what line in the front view? 3.
4. Line 12 in the top view denotes what line in the side view? 4.
5. Surface 6 is represented by what line in the side view? 5.
6. Surface 20 is denoted by what line in the top view? 6.
7. Line 30 in the top view is represented by what line in the 7.
front view?
8. What kind of line is line@? 8.
9. Surface 9 represents what line in the top view? 9.
10. Surface 9 is represented by what line in the side view? 10.
11. Surface 36 represents what line in the front view? 11.
12. Line 14 in the side view is represented by what line in the 12.
top view?
13. Line 13 in the front view is which two lines in the top 13.
view?
14. Line 37 is represented by what line in the front view? 14.
15. Surface 15 in the side view is what surface in the top 15.
view?
16. Surface 7 in the side view represents what line in the top 16.
view?
17. What kind of line is line@? 17.
18. Line 37 is what line in the top view? 18.
19. Line 43 in the top view is what line in the side view? 19.
20. Surface 2 in the front view is represented by what line in 20.
the top view?
21. What kind of line is line@? 21.
22. Line 21 in the top view is what line in the side view? 22. _
23. Line 5 in the top view is what surface in the side view? 23. _
24. Line 29 denotes what line in the side view? 24.
25. Surface 35 in the side view is what surface in the top 25.
view?

28
 Unit
3
After studying this unit, you will be able to:
D Describe drawing formats according to industry
standards.
D Identify and define the parts of a title block.
D Interpret information found in a title block and its
components.
D Understand how notes convey important
information.
The major topiCS covered in this unit will include
drawing formats, title blocks, tolerance blocks,
change blocks, parts lists, and notes.
DRAWING FORMATS
Companies have standard sheet sizes and formats
for the layout of their drawings. A SHEET SIZE is
the size of a drawing layout presented in digital form
(soft copy) or on paper (hard copy). The sheet size
depends on the area needed to represent the part
or assembly. The size and scale of a drawing dictate
the sheet size. A large part with multiple pieces may
not fit on a small sheet. Therefore, a large size will
be required. Whereas, a small part made of one
component may require a smaller size. A letter codes
a sheet size. The standard sheet sizes used in the
industry are shown in Fig. 3-1.
A SHEET FORMAT is a standard that controls
the layout of information on a drawing. The industry
standard for decimal inch drawings is ASME
Y14.1-2005. See Fig. 3-2. For metric drawings,
the sheet format standard is ASME Y14.1M-2005.
The only difference between them is the systems
of measurement. Otherwise, the layouts are the
same. A sheet format provides a standardized way
to arrange information. The following sections cover
the basic elements of a drawing format.
TITLE BLOCK
The TITLE BLOCK is a boxed area located at
the bottom-right of a drawing sheet that contains
29
STANDARD SHEET SIZES
Size Code Sheet Alternate
Dimensions Sizes
(Inches) (Inches)
A 8.5 x 11 9 x 12
B 11 x 17 12 x 18
C 17 x 22 18 x 24
D 22 x 34 24 x 36
E 34 x 44 36 x 48
Fig. 3-1 . ASME standard sheet sizes in decimal inches.
general information about a project. The purpose
of the title block is to identify the project and its
components. The rectangular blocks or boxes
in a title block allow information to be efficiently
organized. Refer to Fig. 3-2, (3) . Some information
is specific about the part, while other information is
general to the project. The company name, drawing
number, part number, and drawing date are some of
the information used in a title block.
Many companies have their own title block
format. The content and arrangement will vary
from one company to another. Some companies
will follow the current ASME standard while others
will not. Although different in layout, all will contain
similar data, as shown in Fig. 3-3. The drawings
in the book show the different formats used in the
industry.
COMPANY INFORMATION
The COMPANY INFORMATION block includes
the name and location of the company that is
responsible for the drawing. See Fig. 3-4, A. Often ,
the company's logo, or trademark is included with
the name.
 Machine Trades Print Reading

8 7 6 5 4

1. PAPER EDGE
D D
2. BORDER

3. TITLE BLOCK

4. TOLERANCE BLOCK

5. ANGLE PROJECTION BLOCK

6. APPLICATION BLOCK
c 7. REVISION STATUS OF SHEETS BLOCK

S. REVISION HISTROY BLOCK

9. MARGIN DRAWING NUMBER BLOCK

10. ZONEA-S

-- - I

8
r I
7 6 5
A

Fig. 3-2. A D-size drawing sheet format , as defined by the ASME Y14.1-2005 standards. The actual size of a D-size drawing
is 22" x 34" or 24" x 36".

DRAWING TITLE DRAWING NUMBER

The DRAWING TITLE or TITLE is the descriptive
name assigned to the drawing. The drawing title is
located in the lower-right corner in a title block. Refer
to Fig . 3-4, B. The title consists of a single noun or
several that describe the drawing. Some companies
may use "PART NAME" or "DESCRIPTION" in
place of "TITLE".
SIZE
The SIZE block identifies the size of the drawing
sheet. A letter references the size. Refer to Fig. 3-4, C.
CAGE CODE
The Commercial and Government Entity code or
CAGE CODE block identifies government projects
by a five-digit government classification code. The
CAGE code refers to a specific government activity.
Refer to Fig. 3-4, D.
30
The DRAWING NUMBER is the identification
number used for referencing, filing , and archiving
a drawing. Most firms assign a drawing number
using a designated system based on their needs.
Numbering systems use a code of numbers, letters,
and dashes to represent departments, drawing
dates, project numbers, and part numbers, as
shown in Fig. 3-5. Drawing numbers are typically
located at the lower-right corner in a title block.
Refer to Fig. 3-4, E.
Margin Drawing Number Block
The MARGIN DRAWING NUMBER BLOCK is used
for placing a drawing number along the sheet border
in the margin area. Refer to Fig. 3-2, (9) . The block
includes a drawing number, a sheet number, and a
revision character, as shown in Fig. 3-6. A margin
drawing number can be located on the border in the
upper-right or lower-right margins of a drawing. Placing
a drawing number in a margin is optional. However,
margin drawing numbers allow the information to be
visible on folded or rolled drawings.
 Title Blocks and Notes

-01 A 316 STAINLESS STEEL PLATE TITANIUM NITRIDE .25

# LTR. MATERIAL SURFACE TREATMENT REMARKS

DESCRIPTION PART NO.
MOUNTING BRACKET
DRAWN BY: DATE:
G&B DESIGNS
SOUTH MILWAUKEE WISCONSIN
MB 4-12
CHECKED BY: DATE:
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT DIVISION RG 4 23
TOLERANCES SCALE:
Ar'r'KUVt.lJ tlY: DATE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1: 1 I

.X = ± . 10 .xxx = ± .005 SHEET SIZE BH 4-28

.XX = ±.02 .XXXX = ± .0005 A
LTR. CHANGE DATE BY ANGLES = ±.5" SHEET 1 OF 1 30-415-4589

DESIGN APPROVAL

DES.ENG.

MFG.ENG.

Q.C.
DATE

.X
UNSPECIFIED TOLERANCES
.XXX
,xx

Machine Finish
Angles
Concentricity
± .005
± .015
± .050
v' 125 Max
± 1·
.005 TIR
This Drawing is the
property of the
Dumore Corpora-
tion . It must not be
reproduced or
copied without
., PART NO.

DUMORE CORPORATION
658-0169

SALES Squareness .001 per in. written permission . 1300 17TH STREET, RACINE, WI 53403
TITLE
REMOVE ALL BURRS BREAK
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SHARP CORNERS PLATE -WHEEL GUARD
MATERIAL SPEC. STAMPING I Req. per
Piece
RECEIVED AS
I~~G I JKM IDATE I 9/23 ISCALE
.0593 C .R. STEEL-SHEET I Pat1ern
No.
RS-658-0169 I~~D I JR IDATE I 9/24 I 1 :1
REVISIONS
A ADDED PAINT FINISH: S-3048 10/3

Fig. 3-3. Title blocks may vary from one company to another. Even though the layouts are different from each other, they both
contain the same types of information .

®
REV
REVISION
SH STATUS
PART NUMBER: COMPANY:
UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES Q)
.XXX = ±.OOS .XX = ±.OlS .X = ±.oso DO NOT SCALE DRAWING ®
MACHINE FINISH 125 MAX . ANGLES = ±.1 DRAWN BY: ® DATE:
CONCENTRICITY .005 TIR ® CHECKED BY: © DATE:
TITLE:
SQUARENESS .001 PER IN.
REMOVE All.. BURRS APPROVED BY: (fY1) DATE: @
BREAK SHARP CORNERS
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
MATERIAL NO:
@
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION: @ © ICAGE CODE@ r RAWING NO.:
®
~
I ®
@ MATERIAL FINISH:
® SCALE: © IWEIGHT:
(8) ISHEET:
CD
Fig. 3-4. The standard components of an ASME standard title block. See text for letter references.

REVISION BLOCK
REVISIONS are any changes made to the original
drawing. Drawing revisions improve part design,
clarify details, change dimensions, correct errors,
reduce costs, and change manufacturing procedures.
31
The REVISION BLOCK allows quick reference to
the current drawing revision . The revision block is
generally located in the lower-right corner of a title
block, as shown in Fig. 3-4, F. Letters designate a
revision, but numbers are also used.
 Machine Trades Print Reading
SCALE BLOCK
The SCALE BLOCK indicates the scale of a
drawing. Refer to Fig. 3-4, G. Typically, a drawing
has one scale as noted in the scale block. However,
drawings with different scales may be required to
specify a part or assembly. "VARIES" in the scale
block indicates multiple scales are on a sheet. Each
drawing will have a separate scale noted. When a
drawing has no specific scale, "DRAWING NOT TO
SCALE" may be on the drawing sheet and "NTS"
(not to scale) in the scale block.
WEIGHT BLOCK
When required, the WEIGHT BLOCK indicates
the weight of the manufactured product. Refer to
Fig. 3-4, H. Actual or estimated values specify the
weight. The actual weight is the "true" weight of a
tinished part. The estimated weight is a calculated
value that controls the part's weight during the
manufacturing process. The first sheet is the only
sheet that shows the weight.
SHEET BLOCK
The SHEET BLOCK shows the current sheet
number for a drawing or a set of drawings. Refer to
Fig. 3-4, I.
PART NUMBER
A PART NUMBER identifies a specific item or part.
Refer to Fig. 3-4, J. Part numbers are located in the
main title block, a parts list, an application block, or
separately on a drawing. A part number mayor may
not be included in a title block. A part number can
represent the manufactured part or a distributor's
number for a supplied part. Some companies also
use the part number as the drawing number.
DRAWN BY AND DATE
The DRAWN BY area in the title block contains
the initials of the drafter who produced the drawing.
Refer to Fig. 3-4, K. The DATE area records the
starting time or initial completion of the drawing.
CHECKED BY AND DATE
The CHECKED BY area in the title block contains
the initials of the drafting department's supervisor
or manager who checks the prints for clarity and
accuracy. The DATE area records the time of
inspection. Refer to Fig. 3-4, L.
32
APPROVED BY AND DATE
The APPROVED BY area in the title block contains
the initials of the drafting department's supervisor
or manager who approves the drawing for use. The
DATE area records the time of approval. Refer to
Fig. 3-4, M.
MATERIAL NUMBER
MATERIAL NUMBER is the number assigned
by a company to identify the material required
for making a part. The number typically refers to
a stock number for a specified material. Refer to
Fig. 3-4, N.
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION indicates the specific
type of material required for manufacturing a part.
It may also specify the size of stock. Refer to
Fig. 3-4, O.
MATERIAL FINISH
The MATERIAL FINISH area contains finish
specifications required for manufacturing a part.
Refer to Fig. 3-4, P.
ANGLE OF PROJECTION BLOCK
The ANGLE OF PROJECTION BLOCK identifies
whether the drawing is a first-angle or third-angle
projection as described in Unit 1-Visualizing
Shapes. Refer to Fig. 3-4, Q.
TOLERANCE BLOCK
TOLERANCE is the amount of variation permitted
in the value of a dimension representing a part or
any of its features. The tolerance is the difference
between the lowest allowable value and the
highest allowable value. A FEATURE is a physical
component of a part identified on a drawing such as
a surface, hole, slot, edge, or any other described
items. The TOLERANCE BLOCK indicates the
general tolerance limits specified for the drawing.
Refer to Fig. 3-4, R. Tolerances can be specified for
one (.X) , two (.XX), three (.XXX), and four (.XXXX)
place decimal dimensions, or for fractional , metric,
and angular dimensions. The limits in the tolerance
block apply to their referenced dimensions unless a
dimension has a specific tolerance noted .
Surface texture orsurfacefinish tolerances usually
are included in the tolerance block. SURFACE
 Title Blocks and Notes

455-0-1494827

l L
SHEET SIZE
DRAWING NUMBER SERIES

ORGANIZATION DESIGNATION

AD-455-045-12-004-RD

l L DRAWING REVISION CHARACTER

ORIGINAL PROJECT NUMBER ISSUED

IN THE GIVEN YEAR

YEAR THE PROJECT WAS ISSUED

SECONDARY BRANCH , DIVISION , OR DEPARTMENT NUMBER

MAIN ORGANIZATION NUMBER

DRAWING TYPE PREFIX

Fig. 3-5. Companies use coding systems similar to these for establishing drawing numbers. Drawing numbers are for drawing
identification, as well as for archiving purposes.

REVISION CHARACTER

I
DRAWING NUMBER \

DRAWING NO.: 455- ot 1494827

SHEET NUMBER \

I SH 1 I A I
\ REV

REV REVISION HISTORY

STATUS ZONE REV OESCRIPTION
I
Fig. 3-6. The drawing number and related information can be located in the margin above the revision block at the upper-right
corner of a drawing sheet.

TEXTURE is the desired surface condition of a TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

manufactured part. Machined parts usually require .X ±.10 .xxx = ±.OO5
certain surface textures. A value system with a .xx = ± .O1O .xxxx = ± .OOO5
designated number describes the surface texture. ANGLES = ± l'

As the value of the number decreases, the surface FINISH SPECIFICATIONS:

condition improves. For example, a 125 finish is a MACHINED SURFACES: 12y MAX
machined finish , whereas a 32 finish is a ground
finish. Surface texture numbers vary anywhere from
GROUND SURFACES: 3U MAX
REMOVE BURRS '" SHARP EDGES TO .015 MAX.
2000 to .5. See Fig. 3-7. Unit 11-Machining Details
has more information on finishes and surface DO NOT SCALE
textures.
Fig. 3-7. A tolerance block gives general tolerance limits that
apply to dimensions that do not have any specified tolerances.

33
 Machine Trades Print Reading
APPLICATION BLOCK
The APPLICATION BLOCK is used to identify
a part's assemblies, systems, and subsystems.
Application blocks are typically located at the left
side of the title block. Refer to Fig. 3-2, (6). The
NEXT ASSY column identifies a part's next higher
assembly with a number (drawing or part) that
corresponds to its next higher assembly drawing.
See Fig. 3-8. The USED ON column is for matching
a part to its system or subsystem.
REVISION HISTORY BLOCK
The REVISION HISTORY BLOCK, revIsion
block, or change block is a record of a drawing's
changes. The block of information is generally
located in the upper-right corner of the drawing as
shown in Fig. 3-2, (8). However, it is common to be
located in the title block area.
New revisions appear underneath the previous
revisions as they occur. A revision history block
contains the following information as shown in
Fig. 3-9:
ZONE (column A)-identifies the revised area of the
drawing. Details on a large drawing can be hard
to locate. Separating a large drawing into smaller
areas called zones makes a drawing easier to
locate features. Zones appear in a grid formation
using numbers and letters for identification. Refer
to Fig. 3-2, (10).
REV (column B)-identifies each change with a
symbol, starting with the letter A. Numbers also
identify the changes. In addition, the symbol
appears on the drawing to locate and identify the
change.
THE PART IS A THE PART IS ALSO A
COMPONENT OF COMPONENT OF
THIS ASSEMBLY A MAIN ASSEMBLY
\ \
\ \
\ \
\ \
\ \
M.300.0 754.4 00 M.300 .0720.400
NEXT ASSY USED ON
APPLICATION
Fig. 3-8. The application block is used for recording a part's
assemblies and subassemblies.
34
DESCRIPTION (column C)-explains the revision.
REVISION, CHANGE, or REVISION RECORD
are alternate terms for this column heading.
DATE (column D)-records the date of a revision.
APPROVED (column E)-contains the authorizing
initials of the person responsible for approving
the revisions.
Some companies may require additional
information for their drawing revisions. Additional
columns can easily provide the necessary space
for the information.
REVISION STATUS OF SHEETS
A project with multiple sheets may require a
revision status of sheets block. The REVISION
STATUS OF SHEETS block records the revision
status for each sheet. See Fig. 3-10. The block is
located at the top of a sheet, next to the revision
block as shown in Fig. 3-2, (7), or on top of the title
block as shown in Fig. 3-4, S. The revision status of
sheets can also be a separate document.
PARTS LIST
The PARTS LIST is a listing of parts needed for
manufacturing a product. See Fig. 3-11. Parts lists
are common with assembly drawings. Other names
for a parts list are material list, bill of materials, or
parts schedule. The information found in a parts list
includes the following:
ITEM-Item number, find number, or key that directs
the print reader to a specific part on the assembly
drawing. A number in a circle with a leader line is
the common way to note an item on a drawing.
PART NUMBER-Part number (PART NO.) or part
identification number (PIN) refers to the actual
manufacturer's part number, including parts from
other sources.
DESCRIPTION-Description or part name indicates
the actual name of that item in the assembly.
Usually, the description consists of one or several
nouns that describe the part.
QUANTITY-Quantity (QTY) or quantity required
(QTY REQD) column contains the actual number
of parts required for the assembly.
MATERIAL-Material (MAT) column contains a
commercial description of the material specified .
NOTES
Notes on a drawing provide additional data and
information not found elsewhere on the drawing.
There are two types of notes used on a drawing-
 Title Blocks and Notes

I I I
REVISION HISTORY
ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
A RELEASED FO R PRODUCTION 3-23 P.H.
E2 B PURCHASE PER PRINT -DELETED 5-3 C.B .
02 C .088 & .50 WIDE-ADDED 5-3 C.B.
02 0 BLUE PAINT STRIPE -ADDED 5-3 C.B.

-cb cb cb ~ (!)
Fig. 3-9. The revision history block shows a list of revisions made to the original drawing.

DRAWING NO.: furnishing. Abbreviations often appear in notes and

in other parts of drawings. The Reference Section
REV in the back of the book lists the industries common
abbreviations.
REVISION
STATUS ZONE Some typical notes found on prints could include:
CHARACTER
REV SH FINISH: BLACK OXIDE
'-tt.. . . A FINISH THIS SIDE WORKING FROM COMPLETED
1, OPPOSITE END
B 1 SHEET
BREAK ALL SHARP CORNERS
NUM SER
C 2 NO DIE PARTING MARKS PERMISSIBLE ON THIS
SURFACE
0 4
NOTES:
WHEN GRINDING .3762/.3757 DIA.
Fig. 3-10. The revision status block, shown only on the first sheet USE MICROMETER NOT AIR SNAP GAUGE
of a set of drawings, records all of the revisions of the sheet set. HAVE SLIGHT TAPER TOWARDS PINION
NOTES:
general notes and local notes. GENERAL NOTES HEAT TREAT PER ES-12-1001
provide general information that is relative to the TEMPER PER ES-12-3000 R 39-43
whole drawing. LOCAL NOTES provide additional (ES NUMBER FOR IN-HOUSE USE)
information that relates to a specific part or feature.
Notes provide information such as heat-treat MINIMUM DEPTH OF 5/8 DRILL TO CLEAR SPINDLE
directions, machining directions, finish requirements, END
measuring requirements, and other specifications.
It is best to read notes before studying the views NO SHARP EDGE ON 4 SQUARE CORNERS
of the part because they may advise you of certain
#3 GA. (.2391)
requirements or restrictions regarding the part. The
HOT ROLLED, PICKLED, AND OILED SHEET STEEL
word "NOTE" usually precedes information it is

4 3964 SLIDE BASE 1 SAE 06

3 5718 PLATE 1 1020 C.R.S .
2 6263 ROLLER 4 SAE 06
1 918 PIN 4 SAE 06
ITEM PART NO . DESCRIPTION QTY. MATERIAL

PARTS LIST
Fig . 3-11 . A parts list contains descriptions and quantities of specific parts needed for manufacturing a product.

35
 Machine Trades Print Reading

DRAWING FORMAT AND TITLE BLOCK QUIZ

Study Fig. 3-12 and identify the parts of the drawing format and title block. Write your answers in the blanks
provided.
1. ________________________________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________________________________
3. ________________________________________________________________________
4. ________________________________________________________________________
5. ________________________________________________________________________

6.
7.
8. ________________________________________________________________________
9. ________________________________________________________________________
10. _____________________________________________________________________

8 7 6 5 4 3

D
2 wlcs D

----I

LTL:3~~fik~A
A 8 7 6 5 2

Fig. 3-12 Drawing Format and Title Block.

36
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION DRAWING NUMBER PART NUMBER

BROOKFIELD, WISCONSIN 53005 A331 44-66-0600

150
1
4X R 16 TYP. 2X0(j @0· 385
.380

I (-+----1
+
NOTE:
REMOVE ALL BURRS

1.250
1.240 ~--+-- + +- ---+ -1.876 ±.001 -I

r-I-t-~
;::;:
CD
l -8- © FINISH
CADMIUM PLATE to
0"
Co)
-....I
.625
.620
5
"8
I

~
I .438+.001
-11-- 14 GA (.074) STL.
(')

'"
UI
Q)
:::l
a.
~-1_1 ~ Z
4 o
S-
UI

G
F
E
~ D
TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED PART NAME
LOCK BUnON PLATE SCALE 1= 1 C I REMOVED CARBURIZED NOTE: 1357 5-25
.X = ± .10 .XXX = ±.005 UPDATE CADMIUM PLATE
.XX = ± .010
FRACTIONS = ±.01O
.XXXX = ±.0005
ANGLES = ±1° NUMBER
r----t-------
I 28-50-7559 I DATE 7/30 B IWAS .390/.380 DIA. 162 8~~8

I I 8A~8
MATERIAL
MACHINED SURFACES 12gMAX

GROUND SURFACES 3V MAX

I DESCRIPTION 14GA (.074) STL. I DR;;N AW A I SEE ECO 161
REMOVE BURRS & SHARP EDGES TO .015
DO NOT SCALE
PART NUMBER 44-66-0600 ICHEB;KED MB LTR. I CHANGE ECO DATE

Fig. 3-13. Lock Button Plate.

 Machine Trades Print Reading

LOCK BUTTON PLATE QUIZ

This activity will test your print reading ability. Study the title block, notes, and views in Fig. 3-13. Read the
questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What is the title or name of this drawing? 1.

2. What is the name of the company responsible 2.
for the drawing?
3. Who created the drawing? 3.
4. What is the part number? 4.
5. Name the type of material used to make the 5.
part.
6. When was revision A issued? 6.
7. What does ECO mean? 7.
8. List the scale of the drawing. 8.
9. The drawings are shown in what angle? 9.
10. What operations must be performed on the 10.
workpiece according to the notes on the print?
11. What is the maximum allowed surface finish 11.
value for machined surfaces?
12. Explain revision @. 12.
13. List the material number. 13.
14. What is the drawing number? 14.
15. What is the tolerance for fractional 15.
dimensions?
16. What type of finish is specified for the part? 16.
17. What is the maximum allowed surface finish 17.
value for ground surfaces?
18. When was the original drawing issued? 18.
19. List the views shown on the drawing. 19.
20. The removal of a carburizing operation is 20.
specified by what ECO number?

38
 Unit ! Q lL It-,o:?t

4 r~ T':-
I ' \
f r.q--
f
,J.
i
j
\ I II' I I
L---"'f-,/- J

After studying th is unit, you will be able to : WHOLE NUMBERS DECIMAL FRACTIONS
o Identify and understand dimensions on a (UNITS)
drawing. '"
.!:

o Identify and understand direct tolerancing "0'"c:: (IJ

(IJ
.!:
=0c::
0
methods. (IJ (IJ
:5 =0 '"
::J
" "
(IJ ::J

o Determine tolerances on fractional , decimal, 0

:5
c::
0
(IJ
Ql
'-
...,'"
.!:
"'- c::
Ql 0
(IJ
0
:5
metric, and angular dimensions. I
c:: 0"c::
::J (IJ
c::
(IJ
Ql
c:: c:: "c:: 0
::J I
c::
o Calculate tolerances on limits. Ql
f--
.!:
f-- I
::J
f--
Ql
0
Ql
f-- I
::J .!:
f--
Ql
f--

o Define terms that apply to dimensioning and 1 3 ; ONE AND THREE TENTHS

tolerancing . 1 0 3 ; ONEANDTH REE HUNDREDTHS

The United States (US) customary system is the
1 0 0 3 ; ONEAN D THREE THOUSANDTHS
measurement system used for engineering drawings
in the United States. The linear measurement used for 1 0 0 0 31 ; ON E AND THREE·TEN
TH OUSANDTHS
length, width, and height is the inch. The measurement
used for angles is the degree. Unit 4 explains how this
system applies to dimensions, tolerances, and limits.
DECIMAL
POINT
/ LR DECIMAL PLACES

This unit also explains the metric system. Fig. 4-1. Chart showing the placement of whole numbers and
decimal fractions in relationship to the decimal point.
DIMENSIONS

A DIMENSION is a definite value of measurement FRACTIONAL DIMENSIONS

for distance between two given points of an object.
Dimensions describe the size and shape of a
part as well as the location of its features. Typical
dimensions include length, width , height, angle,
radius , and diameter. Dimensions on a drawing can
be fractional , decimal, metric, and angular values.
FRACTIONAL DIMENSIONS are measurements
based on fractional numbers. The ASME Y14.S-
2009 Dimensioning and Tolerancing standard does
not recommend fractional dimensioning except
for specifying nominal sizes. NOMINAL SIZE is a

DECIMAL INCH DIMENSIONS

1. 187
r
l
DECIMAL INCH DIMENSIONS are measure-
ments based on decimal inches. DECIMAL INCH is
a fraction, or decimal equivalent, of an inch. A decimal
inch is expressed in bases of ten , such as .1 =1/10 ~.------'~ I
(tenths), .01= 1/100 (hundredths), and .001=1/1000 1. 9062

~
(thousandths) and so forth. See Fig. 4-1. Dimensions
expressed with more decimal places are more .937 L - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _-----I
precise than dimensions with fewer decimal places.
A part requiring high precision machining will have
decimal dimensions expressed in thousandths or ten-
T It--
- -- 3 .875 - .. 1
-----.l

thousandths of an inch. See Fig. 4-2. The decimal inch Fig . 4-2. Decimal inch dimension ing provides precise
is the standard unit of linear measurement in the US. measurements in decimal inches.

39
 Machine Trades Print Reading

general size or stock size used for the identification customary units to SI units. The following example
of a part. It may not be the actual size of the part. For shows how to convert US customary units to SI units
example, a 3/4-10 UNC bolt has a 3/4" nominal by using the ratio of one inch to 25.4 millimeters.
size diameter. However, the actual diameter size
Convert Inches to Millimeters:
may vary from .7288 to .750.
Fractions are common on welding and casting 1 inch = 25.4 millimeters
drawings. Common fractional values found on Example 4-1 :
a drawing include 64ths, 32nds, 8ths, 4ths, and Convert .9375 inch to millimeters.
halves. Fig. 4-3 shows typical fractional dimensions.
Formula for calculating work:
METRIC DIMENSIONS Millimeters = inches x 25.4 mm/in
The International System of Units (SI) is the Solution:
system of measurement used by most international Where
countries. METRIC DIMENSIONING uses SI units Millimeters = .9375 in . x 25.40 mm/in
for its measurement system. The millimeter (mm)
Millimeters = 23.81 mm
is the linear unit of measurement used for metric
dimensioning of engineering drawings. The millimeter
ANGULAR DIMENSIONING
is equal to 1/1000 of a meter. In addition, decimals
express fractions of a millimeter. See Fig. 4-4. ANGULAR DIMENSIONING is a measurement
Due to the growing global economy, the use of of the angle of a line, a surface, or an origin from a
metric dimensioning is expanding in the United given reference point. The reference point can be the
States. Some drawings will require converting US vertex of an angle (the point where two lines intersect
or meet) , or an intersecting line, ray, or plane. The
DEGREE, represented by the symbol 0 , is the unit of
R ~ TYP 0~ THRU measurement for an angle based on 360 divisions of
a circle's circumference. Each division, 1/360th of a
circle, is a degree. See Fig. 4-5.
I A degree can be broken down into minutes (sym-
bol ') and seconds (symbol "). There are 60 minutes
- 1~ to one degree and 60 seconds to one minute.
15 Circle = 360 degrees (360°)
16
~ Degree = 60 minutes (60')
Minute = 60 seconds (60")
-n- ~

Fig. 4-3. Fractional dimensioning provides measurements in

fractional inches. Fractions can indicate nominal sizes that
require less precision than decimal inches.

1'- - - ------.1
r ~

12
VALUE IS 12 MM
180·~4-----~~----4rt~

1--- 4245 ~t
l
270·
A
VALUE IS 42 AND 45 HUNDREDTHS MILLIMETERS.
OR42 1~ MM Fig . 4-5 . The unit of measurement for angles is the degree.
An angle is measured from a plane , origin , or reference point.
Fig. 4-4. Metric dimensioning uses millimeters as the base unit A-Circumference of a circle divided into 360 degrees. 8- An
of measurement. angle is any measurement from 0 degree to 360 degrees.

40
 Dimensions and Tolerances

lJ ~:~Sl JORlJ ~ :~S7/ J

Fig. 4-6, A shows an angle measured in degrees,
minutes, and seconds.
Decimal units can also represent minutes and
seconds. See Fig. 4-6, B. To convert minutes into
I I I I
a decimal, divide the minutes by 60. To convert r-- 2 .375
60.33mm ----j r- 2.437 61.r mm -I
seconds into decimals, divide the seconds by 3600. LALTERNATE ALTERNATE
The following example shows the procedure. UNITS A UNITS

Convert Minutes and Seconds to Decimal

Example 4-2:
Degrees
Degree = 3600 seconds
Minute = 60 seconds
lJI-~~:~Sl J
2. 158 [54.81] -----l
LALTERNATE
Convert 45° l ' 30" to decimal degrees B UNITS

Formula for calculating work Fig. 4-7. Dual dimensioning gives measurements in both US
customary and metric values. A-The position of the values
Decimal Degrees =Degreeso + (minutes + 60) ° +
O

indicates the main and alternate units. B-Brackets indicate

(seconds + 3600)° the alternate units.

Solution:
Decimal Degrees o = 45° + (1 + 60)° + (30 + 3600)°
Decimal Degrees o = 45° + .0166° + .0083°
Decimal Degrees o = 45° + .0249°
Decimal Degrees o = 45.0249° (then round-up)
Decimal Degrees o = 45.025°
Coordinates can also locate angles. Linear
dimensions locate the coordinates for an angular
feature. Refer to Fig. 4-6, C.
DUAL DIMENSIONING
Parts manufactured in global markets may
utilize dual dimensioning on their drawings.
DUAL DIMENSIONING uses both US customary
and metric systems for measurement units. When
using dual dimensioning, the dominant system
appears first, followed by the alternate system. The
dominant system is the standard system used by
the manufacturer based on their location.
There are several formats of dual dimensioning.
The position of the values is one way to express
dual dimensioning. The values are placed above
and below the dimension line or next to each
other separated by a slash as shown in Fig. 4-7, A.
Another format uses brackets [ ] to separate each
system as shown in Fig. 4-7, B.
REFERENCE DIMENSIONS

REFERENCE DIMENSIONS are dimensions

r-J~ '30" r-J~025' without tolerances that only give basic

LL-----,-\ LL- \ measurement information. Reference dimensions

can identify a part or be a general reference of
A \ ' - O. (STARTING ANG~E) \ '--". (STARTING ANGLE,
size. Since reference dimensions are not accurate
measurements, they do not have tolerances.
REFERENCE POINT REFERENCE POINT
(VERTEX) (VERTEX)
For that reason, they are not measurements for
~ . 375 machining or inspection purposes. A reference

!
-I 1.350
e
?I
l-
ANGLE COORDINATES
dimension is placed between parentheses ( ) as
shown in Fig. 4-8.
One application for using reference dimensions
is for drawings of casted parts. The reference
dimensions specify a general size for setting up
the molds required for casting a part. However,
due to the nature of the process, the size of
Fig. 4-6 . Angular dimensions are measured from a plane,
each casted part will vary from the reference
origin, or reference point. Examples A, B, and C represent the
same angle. A-Angular dimension in degrees, minutes, and dimensions. In this situation , the reference
seconds. B-Angular dimension in decimal degrees. dimensions are general notes on size and they
C-Angular dimension by coordinates . are not subject to tolerances.
41
 Machine Trades Print Reading

r- REFERENCE
DIMENSIONS
y

_~ti--,---_ _------,
~
4.500

1.125 1- 1.750 1
I
(1625)- ~'
r I I . '-¥'
. '
1.780
!
~
3.50
2.438
1' f 05

l
Fig. 4-8. A dimension placed between parentheses indicates a y ~
reference dimension .
-~ 1I. - - - -- -- - 4.50 - - - - - - I---
..
~
X

HOLE DESCRIPTION QTY

TABULAR DIMENSIONS
A 1110.375 3
8 1110.562 2
Tabular dimensioning is a common format for
C 1110.250 1
dimensioning parts or assemblies being produced
multiple times that have the same shape but HOLE X Y Z
different sizes. TABULAR DIMENSIONING uses
A1 0.480 3.120 0.500
letters or numbers referenced to a table instead of A2 1.600 0.800 0 .750
dimension lines. A table on the drawing supplies A3 3.820 0.500 0.500
the corresponding values for the lettered parts, as 81 1.080 2.500 THRU
shown in Fig. 4-9. 82 3.100 1.380 THRU
Drawings that contain a large amount of C1 2.060 1.900 TH RU
repetitious features , such as holes, also benefit
from tabular dimensioning. Letters or numbers label Fig. 4-10. Tabular dimensioning is a beneficial way to
dimension repetitious features that would otherwise require
the features, and XYZ coordinates specify their
many lines. Letters code the holes and a chart correlates them
locations. Additional information such as description to dimensions and other relevant information.
and quantity is included as needed. The elimination
of excessive extension and dimension lines makes
reading dimensions easy. See Fig. 4-10.
RECTANGULAR COORDINATE DIMENSIONS

Rectangular coordinate dimensioning is another

~. 0625 x 4~ CHAM . method that eliminates excess dimension and
extension lines. RECTANGULAR COORDINATE

---1+--
IT 8
DIMENSIONING uses distances of two or three
intersecting planes referenced from a baseline or a

-A~'P
datum. A DATUM is an exact point of origin used for
dimensioning or locating a feature. A datum can be
1
1 · '1-- a line, a surface, or intersecting planes.
A feature such as a hole is located horizontally
and vertically from a datum to the feature's center
PART NO. A B point. Centerlines mark the center point's coordinate
3204 2 .75
directions from the datum. This system helps clarify
3205 2.5 .875
3206 3 1
and avoid difficulty in interpreting the drawing. Refer
3207 3 .5 1.125 to Fig. 4-11. Arrowless dimensioning, or datum
dimensioning, are other names for coordinate
Fig. 4 -9. Tabular dimensioning uses letters or numbers instead dimensioning.
of numerical values for dimensions. A chart correlates the
different measurement values to the coded parts.

42
 Dimensions and Tolerances
~ ~ § ~
3.500-- .--+---+--+--+----+---1------,1
: ~ ~
3.120
2.500--t---~
1.900--+- - - - - - t --+-
1.380--+- - - - - + - - - -+_
0.800--+- - - ---f +
0.500--+- - - - - - + - - - - - - --+
0- L..-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---'
DATUM~Io SYMBOL HOLE (2'>
A 0.375
B 0.500
C 0.250
Fig. 4-11. Coordinate dimensioning is common on parts that
use numerical control for machining processes.
POLAR COORDINATE DIMENSIONS
POLAR COORDINATE DIMENSIONING is a
method of locating a point, line, or surface with a
linear distance and an angular measurement from a
fixed point of two intersecting perpendicular planes.
The fixed point of the intersecting planes is the
pole. The fixed direction from the pole is the ray.
The distance from the pole is the radius. The angle
from the ray is the polar angle. See Fig. 4-12. The
common use for polar coordinate dimensioning is
for locating features on circular objects.
TOLERANCING
A TOLERANCE is an acceptable variance
of a dimension for a part or feature. Tolerances
are extremely important in providing sufficient
specifications to allow the proper assembly of units
and the interchangeability of parts. Tolerances
control the size, form, orientation, location, shape,
function, and movement of a part or any of its
features . In addition, tolerances compensate for
deviations that occur during manufacturing. Since
it is impossible to make a part to its theoretical size,
tolerancing is required to control the quality and
precision of a part.
All dimensions have tolerances except for
nominal, referenced, minimum, and maximum
43
/
38°-1
l~",,~, I
r DISTANCE FROM
THE POLE
----- -1 -
~1.95 ~
50°----j
~ POLAR ANGLE
Fig. 4-12. Polar coordinates are useful for locating features on
circular parts or in a circular position.
dimensions. All dimensions begin with a basic size.
BASIC SIZE is the specified theoretical value from
which limits of size are applied.
Basic size should not be confused with "basic
dimensioning" as described in Unit 12-Geometric
Dimensioning and Tolerancing. A basic dimension
is similar, but it differs by relating to the geometric
tolerancing of a feature or datum. "Basic size"
is used with dimensions, such as a part size, or
determining the sizes for hole and shaft systems.
For example, a hole with a basic size of 1.500 may
require a shaft with a basic size of 1.499, but an
allowable maximum variation of .001 on both parts.
See Fig. 4-13.
There are many ways to specify tolerances. Most
tolerances are applied to a dimension or a feature.
Tolerances can also be included in a note, a table,
or a tolerance block. A separate document can also
specify tolerances for a specific part, function, or
feature.
There are three types of tolerances-limits , plus
and minus, and geometric tolerances. Limits or
plus and minus tolerances are direct tolerances.
DIRECT TOLERANCING is the method of
specifying tolerances directly to dimensions that
control location or size. Geometric tolerances
apply to features to control form, profile, orientation,
location, and runout. Geometric tolerances are
discussed in Unit 12-Geometric Dimensioning
and Tolerancing. This section explains the
tolerancing of dimensions.
 Machine Trades Print Reading

r HIGH LIMIT

~ ;;~~ ------j
L LOW LIMIT

Fig. 4-14. Limits are the maximum and minimum acceptable

--1I . - If--
values fo r a dimension .
1 499 +.0005
.0005

J \L
BASIC SIZE
TOLERANCES
limit is the tolerance. The tolerance is the permissible
range of size for the dimension.
Calculating the Tolerance of Limits
Example 4-3:
Calculate tolerance for Fig. 4-14.
Formula for calculating work
Tolerance = High Limit - Low Limit
1.500 ~:gg6 Solution:

BASIC SIZE J \L TOLERANCES

Tolerance = 2.750 -
Tolerance = .007
2.743

Fig. 4-13. The basic size of a part is the theoretical size from
which tolerances are applied. SINGLE LIMIT

A SINGLE LIMIT tolerance is a variance on

LIMIT TOLERANCING
Success in manufacturing relies on the ability
to duplicate numerous parts to meet exact
specifications for assembly purposes. Specific
tolerances are required for parts to mate or
join properly. One way to specify a tolerance is
by indicating the limits of a dimension. LIMITS
are the maximum and minimum sizes allowed
for a dimension. Limits are beneficial when the
dimension's value cannot exceed a maximum value
and cannot be less than a minimum value.
HIGH LIMIT
a dimension that refers to either an absolute
maximum value or an absolute minimum value. The
abbreviation MIN (minimum) or MAX (maximum)
next to a dimension's value indicates a single limit
tolerance. See Fig. 4-15. With a maximum limit, the
dimension cannot be larger than the specified value
and the minimum value (unspecified limit) can
theoretically be 0.00 (zero). With a minimum limit,
the dimension cannot be smaller than the specified
value and the maximum value (unspecified limit)
can theoretically be infinite. However, single limits
are only used when other geometry such as
dimensions or features control the unspecified limit.

The HIGH LIMIT is the maximum value given 96 DP DIAMOND KNURL

to a dimension. Under this condition , the high
limit is the largest acceptable dimension used for R .010 MAX
manufacturing. See Fig. 4-14.

LOW LIMIT

The LOW LIMIT is the minimum value given to

a dimension . Likewise, the low limit is the lowest .13 ~~ I
acceptable dimension used for manufacturing.
When specifying upper and lower limits, the high
.75 MIN ~ f--
limit appears above the Jow limit. Refer to Fig. 4-14. Fig. 4-15. A single limit dimension specifies an absol ute
The difference between the high limit and the low maximum or minimum value for a dimension.
44
 Dimensions and Tolerances

Single limits are common for radii , depths of holes,
length of threads and knurls, and other features that
require a set limit.
PLUS AND MINUS TOLERANCES
PLUS AND MINUS TOLERANCING is the
method of tolerancing that specifies a dimension's
variation in a positive and negative direction. The
plus symbol (+) indicates the tolerance in the positive
direction while a minus symbol (-) represents the
tolerance in the negative direction . The plus and
minus tolerances are placed next to a basic size.
The plus tolerance is above the dimension line
while the minus tolerance is below the dimension
line. See Fig. 4-16. The tolerances can be unilateral
or bilateral.
UNILATERAL TOLERANCES
UNILATERAL TOLERANCE is a variance from a
dimension in only one direction, either plus (+) or
minus (-) . See Fig. 4-17.
BILATERAL TOLERANCES
BILATERAL TOLERANCE is a variance from a
dimension in both directions: plus (+) and minus (-)
dimensions. The variances can be different values
or they can be the same value. See Fig. 4-18. When
the plus and minus variances are the same, the
dimension and tolerance will appear on one line
with the ± symbol next to them. See Fig. 4-19. Also,
when calculating a plus and minus tolerance with
equal value, the tolerance value is doubled because
it represents the variance in both directions. For
example, if an equal bilateral tolerance is ±.005,
then the actual tolerance is .01 (.005 x 2).
SPECIFIED TOLERANCES
A SPECIFIED TOLERANCE is any tolerance
directly applied to a dimension. The unit of
measurement for a specified tolerance is the same
unit used for their related dimension. Tolerances
can be specified in fractional , decimal inch, angular,
and metric units.
FRACTIONAL TOLERANCES

BASIC SIZE " \

r PLUS TOLERANCE
Fractional dimensions require fractional

f--
tolerances. Fractional tolerances appear on a

1. 375 +~~; ~ drawing as shown in Fig . 4-20.

DECIMAL INCH TOLERANCES

L MINUS TOLERANCE
Tolerances for dimensions in decimal inches can
be expressed as limits or plus and minus tolerances.
Fig. 4-16 . Plus and minus tolerancing . See Fig. 4-21.

T
Means:
l---25 ~ gg~~
Means: Means:
2" TO 2 ~" 2.495" TO 2 .5" 50· TO 50.0 5·
A B C
Fig. 4-17. Unilateral tolerances indicate the allowable variation of a basic size from one direction only. either + or-.
A-Fractional dimensions with unilateral tolerances. B-Decimal inch dimensions with unilateral tolerances.
C-Angular dimensions with unilateral tolerances .

45
 Machine Trades Print Reading

1
2 +32
1
-64 ~ 3.125 ~:88~ -1
Means: Means: Means:
49.998' TO 50.00S ~" TO 2 ~" 3.123" TO 3.128"
A B C
Fig. 4-18 . Bilateral tolerances indicate variation permitted from basic dimensions in both directions, + and -.
A-Angular dimensions with bilateral tolerances. B-Fractional dimensions with bilateral tolerances.
C-Decimal inch dimensions with bilateral tolerances.

BASIC SIZE \

1----1.25 ±.05-----1 L...-----...JII'------------'

L PLUS AND MINUS
TOLERANCE f--10oo~ggf--1 f-- 995~gg6 --1
Fig. 4-19. Plus and minus tolerancing with an equal tolerance A B
in both directions. The dimensional range is 1.2"-1 .3"

3
T
+ 0 I 1.005
f--- 1 .000 ----j
I
14 _-.1
32

L<-----_ C

Fig. 4-21 . Several ways of expressing specified decimal inch

tolerances . A-Bilateral tolerances. B-Unilateral tolerance .
C-Limits.

L.-----_ _ ANGULAR TOLERANCES

~
Tolerances for angular dimensions are shown in

1 ± 3i I I degrees or decimal degrees. Angular dimensions

T ~1L-.==-=--=--=--3-~-±-3-i-----'.1
B
Fig. 4-20. Fractional dimensions with specified fractional
tolerances . A-Unilateral tolerances. B-Bilateral tolerances.
46
and tolerances are expressed with the same
number of decimal places. See Fig. 4-22.
METRIC TOLERANCES
Metric dimensions require metric tolerances .
The precision of most metric dimensions are
two or three decimal places. Higher precision
requires four or more decimal places. Also, metric
dimensions and tolerances do not use trailing
zeros. See Fig . 4-23 for examples of metric
tolerances.
 Dimensions and Tolerances

r----~ ~ o

\ / / 44 ±. \0 08
44 +. 004
0

y L----
-.000 _
B
-----'

Fig. 4-22 . Angular dimensions with specified tolerances . A-Unilateral and bilateral, equal tolerances specified in degrees,
minutes, and seconds. B- Unilateral and bilateral, equal tolerances specified in decimal degrees.

I-- SOS+gs ~
A B c
THE PLUS OR MINUS SIGN IS OMITIED
IN UNILATERIAL METRIC TOLERANCES
WHEN A VALUE IS O.

Fig . 4-23. Several ways of expressing specified metric tolerances . A-Unilateral tolerance .
B-Equal bilateral tolerance. C-Limits.

UNSPECIFIED TOLERANCES
1
FRACTIONS ± 64
Not all dimensions will have a direct tolerance.
An UNSPECIFIED TOLERANCE is a tolerance that 2 DIGIT DECIMAL ± .01
applies to a dimension that does not have a specified
tolerance. A general note provides unspecified 3 DIGIT DECIMAL ±.OOS
tolerances for fractional , decimal, angular, and
metric dimensions as shown in Fig. 4-24. ANGULAR ±.So

METRIC ± O.S MM

Fig. 4-24 . Unspecified tolerances appear in a note on a

drawing. They apply to all dimensions that do not have any
specified tolerances.

47
 REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

©© A
B
RELEASED FOR PRODUCTION
PURCHASE PER PRINT -DELETED
3-23
5-3
P.H.
CB
IDENTIFY THICKNESS C .088 & .50 WIDE -ADDED 5-3 CB
D BLUE PAINT STRIPE -ADDED 5-3 CB
OF RING (.088) WITH
BLUE PAINT STRIPE
APPROX .. 50 WIDE .290
ON O.D. l·280
~
RING .088
I THICKNESS: .086
s:
III
n
NOTE: :::r
:::I
- - CD
MAKE FROM PART No. A161420 ::;I
III
FREE DIA. a.
01::>
00
3.945
® DELETED
CD
In
""C

-
::::!.
3.835
Ii MATERIAL:
:::I

JJ

J \LL
CD
.150 0 SAE 1060 - 1090 III
a.
.134 CARBON SPRING STEEL :::I
co
.350 HARDNESS RC 48-52
334
2X 0.136 !:~6~ .774
MIN. GAP INSTALLED
This drawing is the
sropert y of the DUMORE CORPORATION
umore Corporation.
It must not be 1300 17TH STREET, RACINE, WI 53403
reproduced or
UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES DESIGN APPROVAL DATE copied without TITLE

.xxx - ±.005 .xx - ±.015 .x - ±.050 wntten permission . SNAP RING-B88

I0
DES. ENG.
MATERIAL: SEE NOTE
MACHINE FINISH 125 MAX. ANGLES - 11" MFG.ENG. SIZE rAGE CODE IDRAWN BY, T.L. lOATE: 3-3 ISCALE: REV

B 1: 1
r
FINISH: IDATE: 3-20
/cHECKED BY: KT
CONCENTRICITY .005 TIR Q.C.

SQUARENESS .001 PER IN. SALES DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

REMOVE ALL BURRS

BREAK SHARP CORNERS

ART
NO. A161535
Fig. 4-25. Snap Ring.
 Dimensions and Tolerances

SNAP RING QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 4-25. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What is the part number? 1.

2. Name the type of material used to make the 2.

part.
3. State what change was made by revision D. 3.
4. What is the scale of the drawing? 4.
5. Who released revision A for production? 5.
6. What size is the drawing? 6.
7. Who created the drawing? 7.
8. What is the ring thickness? 8.
9. What is the required width of the blue paint 9.
stripe?
10. What tolerance is specified for angles? 10.
11. Who was responsible for making revision B? 11.
12. What is the name of the part? 12.
13. Dimensions .280, 3.835, .134, and .334 are 13.
examples of what type of limits?
14. What tolerance is used for one-place decimal 14.
dimensions?
15. What is the maximum value for unspecified 15.
surface finishes?
16. What is the minimum allowable size on the 16 .
.136 dimension?
17. What is the tolerance for the FREE DIA? 17.
18. What is the tolerance for the ring thickness? 18.
19. Ring should be made from what existing part? 19.
20. What is the tolerance for the ring width 20.
opposite the gap?

49
 Unit
WORKING DRAWINGS
5
After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o Interpret a one-view drawing.
o Interpret a two-view drawing.
o Interpret a simple three-view drawing .
The units up to this point were designed in stages to
explain various methods and skill-building techniques.
Review the units that illustrate the various views, title block
information, and drawing examples. Most simple prints
only require up to three views of workpiece. However, as
stated in Unit 2, up to six views of an object can be shown .
WORKING DRAWINGS
Working drawings are sometimes called "detailed
drawings " or "detailed working drawings." A
WORKING DRAWING provides all details necessary
to properly describe the part. The information should
include the correct views, dimensions, part number,
tolerances, and other specifications for manufac-
turing. The working drawing is actually the shop
print of that individual part.
Working drawings can be grouped into three
general types: one-view drawings, two-view draw-
ings, and three-view drawings (multiview) . In each
3.625
1.500 1.500
rtJ .500
T
Fig. 5- 1 . One-view drawing - Shaft.
50
type of working drawing, the specific information
for manufacturing must be clearly and carefully
located on the drawing.
ONE VIEW
Objects that are uniform in cross section, such
as cylindrical parts and thin flat parts, usually appear
on prints as one-view drawings.
A centerline through a cylindrical part indicates
that the part is symmetrical. Diameters are specified
by the symbol </J, a letter D, or an abbreviation DIA .
A thin, flat object which appears as a one-view
drawing has its thickness listed in the materials
specification area of the title block or it may be
stated as a special note . See Figs. 5-1 and 5- 2 .
TWO VIEWS
Two-view drawings are commonly used to
describe mach ined parts. These parts need not be
very complex, but fulfill certain conditions :
1 . That a third view would show no significant con-
tours of the object .
~
t
rtJ 1 .000 rtJ 1 .500
 Working Drawings
.033 THICK
Fig. 5-2. One-view-Gasket.
2. That two of the three views would be the same.
3. That parts are simple cylindrical, rectangular,
stamped pieces, etc.
4. That no additional information, such as dimen-
sions, would be provided by a third view.
The designer or drafter will decide which two
views best represent the details of the part. The two
views selected will differ depending on the part. The
most common arrangement for two-view drawings
is the use of top and front views as shown in Fig.
5-3. If the front and right side views were used as
TOP
I I
FRONT
Fig. 5-3. Two-view drawing-Guide.
51
alternatives, the drilled hole could be misinterpreted.
Note: Top view shows drill hole by use of a circle
and two centerlines. Circle in top view correctly in-
dicates true size and shape of drilled hole.
Likewise, the front view describes the beveled
ends more clearly then the top view and right-side
view (not shown). As mentioned, the selection of
the two views is most important to the reader for
detail clarification.
In Fig. 5-4, the front view of a BEARING BLOCK
shows a small circle within a larger circle. This is
the best view to represent the drilled or reamed hole.
Also, two angular supports are shown on either side
of the large circle. The representation of both
angular supports and the drill hole are found directly
above on the top view. The top and front views
supply the necessary details to describe the BEAR-
ING BLOCK without the addition of a third view.
THREE VIEWS
Three-view or multiview drawings are generally
more complex in nature than one and two-view
drawings. The three-view drawing may use any of
the six principle views (see Unit 2) to illustrate the
part. However, it is general practice when drawing
three views to include the front view as one of the
selected views.
 +- -~
+
I I
I

+ I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
-$-
+ - ~
+

Fig . 5-4 . Two-view - Bearing Block .

---+-- + -----

TOP

-f-- - - - --+--- + --+--

1--'-

I
I l
I I
I
FRONT RIGHT S\DE
Fig . 5- 5 . Three -view drawing - Double Yoke .

52
 Working Drawings

When selecting the third view (whichever view
is chosen), it must be arranged in the correct posi-
tion or relationship to the other two remaining
views. In Fig. 5-5, the top view is correctly posi-
tioned with the front view. With the use of the right-
side view, the DOUBLE YOKE becomes more clear
to the reader.
The next illustration, Fig. 5-6, uses similar view
arrangements: top, front, and right side. The top
and front views of the FORK contain the majority
of the necessary details. However, the right-side
view is a most important key in describing the con-
tour of the FORK. The outer edges on the right-side
view are slightly curved. This cannot be fully shown
on the top or front views. The only other view which
would contain the same contour information is the
left-side view (not shown). The right-side view was
selected because it eliminated most of the hidden
lines.
Carefully examine all lines on the views before
deciding on the exact shape of the part.
The dimensions were not added to Figs. 5-5 and
5-6 for line clarity reasons. The work problems that
follow contain the necessary dimensions.

~
~

- - I - -
I

L...- -
....,

/'"
I ,,"
l""r--I
+f-+-++-
\. ' - / / 1----.1"'1
'--

Fig. 5-6. Three-view - Fork.

53
 I r~283940
I LOCKHART TOOL COMPANY, INCORPORATED
416 KENA DRIVE ALEXANDRA, ILLINOIS 6104Z
DRAMNG NO
i
~rro.o
I :\

4S
J !A~
R5 --~
-- - --
CD
0 -
114.0

- 96.2 s
t CD I
Cl
(')
:r.
::::I
(l)

I ...-I
Cl
20.0 I
(J1
.j::>
I L
Co
(l)
rn

"'- 40.0 I - - - ..."tJ

:r
t
l!
.-+
I

i
:lJ
I (l)
Cl
Co
I I :i"
co
_1

07.0~ - 25.4 ~ 09.04~

8.68
I

lJjLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

FINISH SPECIFICATIONS
I[ METRIC [i G

F
MACHINED SURFACES lo/MAX.
E
GROUND SURFACES 3VMAX. PART NAI£
REAR BRACKET SCALE FULL D 5R ADDED JS 133 8-4
METRIC TOLERANCE c 96.2 WAS 56.0 KD 132 8 4
WHOLE NUMBERS ! 1.5 ~
M1033 DATE
7/2
ONE PLACE !.8 IlATERI.... B 114 WAS 50.8 KD 31 8-2
I TWO PLACE
ANGULAR
!.25
!Z"
DESCRll'TION DRAWN
BY VJH A RELEASED 12 7-1
--
DO NOT SCALE PART IUIIER A283940 CHECIIED
BY JFS CHANGE ECD DATE

Fig. 5-7. Rear Bracket.

 Working Drawings

DIRECTIONS - QUIZ QUESTIONS

1. The industrial prints in this section will test your print reading ability.
2. Study the views, dimensions, title block, and notes in Figs. 5-7 through 5-11.
3. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

REAR BRACKET QUIZ

1. How many holes does the part have? 1.

2. What size is the smallest hole? 2.
3. What system of measurement is used on the print? 3.
4. How long is the bracket? 4.
5. What is the material number? 5.
6. How thick is the bracket? 6.
7. What is the largest size to which the small diameter 7.
hole can be drilled?
8. What was revision @ ? 8.
9. How far is the 9.04 diameter hole located from the 9.
end of the short leg of the bracket?
10. What type of break line is shown in the top view? 10.
11. What tolerance is used on two-place metric 11.
dimensions?
1 2. How long is the short leg of the bracket? 1 2.
13. What is the high limit on the 114.0 dimension? 13.
1 4. What new information was added in revision ®? 1 4.
15. What does symbol ¢ represent? 15.

55
 I.'S .. 1 ® W1ATERIAL OPTIONS:
![A~ 2.J..tOLES
/. ARMSTRONG
2. ARMSTRONG
AS460
ANe90
.3. ARMSTRONG AN892

R~4
®®
.. O~4
THICKNESS MUST BE.
.02e
UNIFORM W1THIN G,IVE.N LIMITS

® I2EF. CARTE:/2 CM.8. CORP. #/V1121-1347

~
III

R~4 R -:78
@@ (')
~
:r
(l)

~
....
tTl
en
@ IMULTIPLE usE] III
Co
(l)
IJ)

iJ
~,
:::l

~I I~- ~:: Is~~~ I IR~~'~ 1

r+
1---1 1 --1- NAME
MAT'l ::0
(l)
III
PUMP SPECIALTlES CORPORATlON Co
~I

E
- - 1-- - - - - - - - - 1- - --
----
1-- 1 - -

GASK E. T
PART NO

NAME
3114685
KENOSHA. WIS. ~5
MODel N 0 6 . 5 1 0 -
10 - 199
e.S2.
5'
to

I--- i _ DESCRIPFUE.L PUMP TO

MACHINED DIMENSION TOLERANCES
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1-1 MArl OPTIONS APtJEp.._ zK '~2~ -- CYLINDER BLOCK
2 DIGIT DECIMAL AND FRACTIONS ± .01 0
<5 NoTE. ADOe.b __ ~_
3 DIGIT DECIMAL ±.005 ~ ~ Wn-rc
\ ~ ADDED___ _ _ _~'a//t;
_ _ _ I!!
__ REPORT All ERRORS TOOL NO.
4 DIGIT DECIMAL ±.0005
E WA5.018-:01~ THICK J!1I ~ TO TOOL DESIGN DEPT. -
0 WASRAYBE5T~- F·53 Jm~,.5
I ~
STAMP C )J/,dg AAI-894 W.: ~ / V

TOOL NO -
~ ~ 022-0/tfb
I
L/
A
. '
RELEASE.D
1lW? -1/...
~~ k I
.

~~ eL._-/4.}~~
SC ALE
DRAWN BY
FULL NO. OF SHEETS
DATE APP 'D BY
SHEET NO.
~
~ Df'TE

INT. 1 DATE • CHECKtu or APP 'D BY

DET. REVI SION
PART NO.

Fig . 5-8 . Gasket .

 Working Drawings

GASKET QUIZ

1. What maximum thickness is allowed on the part? 1.

2. What is the full length of the slot? 2.
3. Determine the center distance between the two holes? 3.
4. Give the high limit on the hole sizes. 4.
5. List the radii shown on the part print. 5.
6. By whom was the print drawn? 6.

7. What note is given regarding part thickness? 7.

8. How far is the right hole from the vertical centerline 8.
of the part?
9. List model numbers using the gasket. 9.
10. What tolerance is used on four-digit decimal 10.
dimensions?
11. List the part description. 11.
12. What scale is the print? 12.
13. How wide is the slot? 13.
14. How thick was the gasket when originally 14.
manufactured?
1 5. What material was used in the past to make the gasket? 1 5.

57
 1
MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL
13135 WEST LISBON ROAD
CORPORATION
BROOKFIELD. WISCONSIN 53005
I ORAWtG NO. 130-2o-or50

l.l20 ./15
>--,275_
.2b7
NOTE~
ALL ~URFACES MUST BE CLEAN

I
I

r..------ I

f ,..---- I

312
--
"-~
-
19 s
.304

~ 1---
~---

r----- 1 32-
r--(!\--- ~¢ .138
Q)
n
::T
5"
- - i .336
.3=>\
.f42 CAST ~

...-I
~ ~~
,
.142 Q)

~
a.
r------------ ~
~ .138
U1
co .042 III

.0.38 ¢ .160 CAST ...

."

L,~~
.154 ...5'
'- .0(02 gE F.
.058 . - ./58 f--
.154
:1J
~
Q)
a.
:::::I
to

f - - . .317_
.307

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED G

FINISH SPECIFICATIONS F
MACHINED SURFACES 'o/MAX E
GROUND SURFACES o/MAX 0
DECIMAL TOl XX t 010 XXX t 005 xxxx I 0005
PART NA.ME
BLADE CLAMP SCALE
.4:
_- J -
C
FRACT:ON TOL
ANGLE TOL I()
t 010 NUMBER 8(020
-- -.
STEEL DATE
_. . ._ - - .._ - - _.. _ - 1-----._--
2·2 B
t--JIU!.
I MATERIAL

RFMOVE BURRS AND SHARP EDGE-S TO OIS MAX

DESCRIPTION
f---~--L.....-.-
INVESTMENT CASTING.
- - 1 - - - - - - - _.. - - .----
DRA.WN
BY A
-
~
DO NOT SCALE PART NUMBER
30-20- 0150 CHECKED
BY CHANGE ECO DATE

SIP INC.

Fig. 5-9. Blade Clamp"

 Working Drawings

BLADE CLAMP QUIZ

1 . What size is the rectangular hole in the part? 1.

2. How long is the part? 2.

3. How high is the part? 3.

4. What tolerance is used on fractional dimensions? 4.

5. Which hole does not go through the entire part? 5.

6. What is the low limit of the diameter of the large cast 6.

hole?
7. What is the high limit of the diameter of the small cast 7.
hole?
8. What are the minimum and maximum acceptable 8.
distances between the centers of the two cast holes?
9. What scale is the print? 9.

10. Give a description of the material used to make the 10.

part?
1 1 . What maximum part thickness is allowed? 11 .

12. How far does the rectangular hole go into the large 12.
cast diameter hole?
13. What is the material number of the part? 13.

14. What type of line shows the rectangular hole in the 14.
side view?
15. What are the minimum and maximum allowable distances 15.
between the nearest edges of the two cast holes? Be sure to
consider both hole position variation and hole size variation.

16. Is the. 1 42 hole in the center of the rectangular hole? 16.

17. What are the minimum and maximum allowable dimensions for 17.
the long side of the rectangular hole?

18. In the side view, are the cast holes in the center of 18.
the part?
19. What is the high limit of the 9/16 dimension? 19.

20. Is the shape of the part square or rectangular? 20.

59
 5242
NOTE :
·BREAK ALL SHARP CORNERS.

3.500
.750
-~
.63
R.03

• li ~
Ql
n
=r

--]-~O· J T L
S·
@ 0 .550 (tI

...--I
Ql
a.
en (tI
en
o
750 "...
::::!.
:::J
REF.
X 4S CHAMFER 2 .057 :Xl
(tI
Ql
REF.
2 PLACES ® rf, .332 @
a.
:::J
<C
2 . 187
©
CD0 . 586 REF.
¥/ 330
.584 BEFORE THREAD ING
BEFORE THREADING

::T 1 OF 2 IAI NPS 'UD ._

Fig . 5- 10 . Threaded Shaft - Pulley Puller .

 Working Drawings

THREADED SHAFT-PULLEY PULLER QUIZ

1. What tolerance is required for two-place decimals? 1.

2. What is the length of the 30° chamfer on the small 2.

threaded diameter?
3. What is the scale of the workpiece? 3.

4. What is the minimum overall length of the workpiece 4.

allowed?
5. How long is chamfer used for the large threaded 5.
diameter?
6. How long is the .550 diameter section found between 6.
the two threaded diameters?
7. What size is the hex stock? 7.

8. What is the diameter of the thread relief required for 8.

the large diameter thread?
9. What is the length of that thread relief? 9.
10. What is the length of the large threaded diameter 10.
including chamfer?
11. What is the minimum outside diameter of the small 11.
diameter thread?
12. What is the high limit on the large threaded diameter? 12.
13. When was the last print revision? 13.
14. When was the print originally drawn? 14.
15. What does the symbol comprised of a circle with the 15.
letter "8" inside mean?
16. How many radii does the part contain? 16.
17. What tolerance is specified for fractional dimensions? 17.
18. What is the distance from the shoulder of the small 18.
thread to the hex head shoulder?
19. What portion of the pulley requires heat treating? 19.
20. Which change revision was required by the manufac- 20.
turing department?

61
 DESIGN APPROVAL

DES.ENG

MFG. ENG.

Q.C.
DATE UNSPECIFIED TOLERANCES
.xxx
.xx
.x
Machine F,nish
Angles
± .005
± 015
± .050
125 Max
±1
ThiS DrawIng IS
Ihepropertyofthe
Dumore Corpora·
tlon It must nol be
reproduced or
copied without wnt·
ten permissIon
., PART NO.

DUMORE CORPORATION
AISI600

Concentricity 005 TIR

SALES SQuareness 001 perin 1300 17TH STREET RACINE . WI 53403
REMOVE ALL BURRS TITLE
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING BREAK SHARP CORNERS GUSSET
MATERIAL SPEC:
1 ReQ pel
PIece
RECEIVED AS ~~G J4!; DATf,o/9 SCALE

1018 r Paltern
No
~~D ~ DAT~I'2Q /.-j
REVISIONS

4.85
s:
III
0
~
::l
CD

...-i
III
a.
0'1 CD
1/1
N
"'0
:!.

1.12. ~
...
::l

JJ

t-I
CD
.186 III
a.
.170 ::l
(Q
2.41
Ti-liCKNE5S
~
~
.61
1 t

~ .I. 2.15-J
I---
USE :

K .. E I 75 ho160 151 150 I h4 1 11 110 I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 I 1

Fig . 5- 11 . Gusset.
 Working Drawings

GUSSET QUIZ

1. How thick is the part? 1.

2. What material specifications are given? 2.
3. What is the minimum overall length allowed for the 3.
part?
4. How long is dimension 0 ? 4.
5. What is the high limit on the 2.15 dimension? 5.
6. What is the high limit on the .375 dimension? 6.
7. How long is dimension 0 ? 7.
8. By whom was the print drawn? 8.
9. Are there any revisions made on the print? 9.
10. Who checked the print? 10.
11. What tolerance is used on one-place decimal 11 .
dimensions?
12. How long is dimension [£J ? 12.
13. What scale is the print? 13.
14. What directions are given on the print in regard to 14.
sharp corners?
15. What minimum part thickness is allowed? 15.

63
 Unit
6 f -
~ ~ t j
l"i
~

r ~"'"
•
~ *'H. I
t

; I \ ~

.- i.' .J

After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o Identify machining processes for holes including
drilling, reaming, countersinking, boring,
counterboring , and spotfacing.
o Recognize symbols used for specifying holes.
o Evaluate specifications for holes.
o Determine dimensions for holes.
Various machining operations make holes,
enlarge holes, finish holes, and prepare surfaces
around holes. These operations include drilling,
boring , reaming, counterdrilling, countersinking,
counterboring, and spotfacing. The "ASME Y14.S-
2009 DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING"
standard has various symbols that represent holes
on a drawing.
A circle on a drawing represents a hole but it
also can represent a surface. The size of a hole is
defined by its diameter and depth. Basic dimensions
include a leader, a diameter symbol (0), and a
value. "THRU" placed after the value indicates the
hole goes through the part. See Fig. 6-1.
The depth of a hole is noted by the depth symbol
C~), followed by its value. The depth's measurement
always follows the diameter's size as shown in
Fig. 6-2. The depth symbol is not required when
a drawing clearly shows a hole going through the
part.
Multiple holes are specified by placing the number
of holes with the "BY" symbol (x). The number and
symbol are placed before the diameter dimension.
For example, nine holes with the same diameter
would look like Fig. 6-3.
Other ways of dimensioning holes include
specifying by fractions, abbreviations, machine
processes, and drill or tool sizes. The ASME Y14.S-
2009 standard does not recommend those formats
for dimensioning but they are still used. ASME
standard recommends using symbols instead of
words for specifying dimensions. See Fig. 6-4. When
specific manufacturing processes are required , the
ASME recommends placing them as a separate
note on the drawing or in a related document.
DRILLED HOLE
Drilling is the most common machining opera-
tion. DRILLING is the process of cutting a hole in
DIAMETER SYMBOL

HOLE SIZE (DIAMETER)

DIAMETER SYMBOL

rr r
HOLE SIZE (DIAMETER)

INDICATES THE HOLE

GOES THROUGHT
THE PART
rr DEPTH SYMBOL

HOLE DEPTH

0.75 THRU 0.750 T.625

- -- - LEADER POINTS TO THE - .1
. --- LEADER
CENTER POINT FEATURE IT REPRESENTS .

CIRCLE INDICATES A HOLE HOLE

Fig. 6-1. Current ASME standard for specifying a hole. Fig. 6-2. Dimension of a hole with a specified depth .

64
 Holes

INDICATES NUMBER OF HOLES passes completely through the part or material.

rr DIAMETER SYMBOL

HOLE SIZE (DIAMETER)

Through holes appear on a drawing as hidden lines
(dashed) that extend to the outside surfaces, as
shown in the front view of Fig. 6-5, A.
A BLIND HOLE has a specified depth that does
not go completely through the part or material. A
9X 0.375 drill will produce a conical point at the bottom of the
hole, as shown in Fig. 6-5, B.
Typical dimensions for drilled holes require
information for the quantity, size, and depth of the
holes. In specific situations, such as circular parts,
equal spacing or angular dimensioning specifies
the needed information. See Fig. 6-6.

0.625 T.875

Fig. 6-3. Multiple holes of the same size specified once on a

TOP VIEW TOP VIEW
drawing.
I

1
I

or through a surface with a drill. A DRILL is a cylin-

I I I I
I I I 0.875
drical shaped tool with a sharpened point and edges I I I I I I
that cuts a specific size hole. The diameter of the I I
I I L---J--f----'-
drill determines the size of the hole it makes. The I I I
'- ./

chuck of a rotary machine such as a hand drill, drill I

FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW
press, lathe, or milling machine holds the drill. As
THROUGH HOLE BLIND HOLE
the machine spins the chuck, the operator moves
A B
the drill toward the part's surface while it rotates and
cuts a hole in the material. Fig . 6-5. Two types of holes. A-A through hole goes
There are two classifications of drilled holes- completely through a part. 8-A blind hole is machined to a
through holes and blind holes. A THROUGH HOLE specified depth .

0.468 0.468

TOP VIEW TOP VIEW TOP VIEW

ITtJ ITtJ
I
I
I

FRONT VIEW
A
I
I
I
I
I
I

FRONT VIEW
B
I
I
I

c
Fig . 6-4. Different ways to dimension the same sized hole. A & 8-A front or side view is needed
because the top view does not indicate the depth of the hole. C-Only one view is needed
because the top view indicates the depth of the hole.

65
 Machine Trades Print Reading

4X 0.328 3X 0.312

120°
EQUAL SPACING ANGULAR DIMEMSIONING

A B
Fig. 6-6. Specifying holes in circular patterns. A-The equal division of centerlines indicates equal
spacing . 8-Angles indicate the spacing along the circular centerline .

BORED HOLE
BORING is the operation of enlarging a hole to a
close tolerance and fine finish. It produces a straight
and round hole more accurately than by drilling. A
boring bar and single point tool produces holes
through a wide range of diameters. A bored hole is
dimensioned the same as a drilled or reamed hole.
The diameter of a bored hole appears in the top
view of the part. A tolerance or a specific note may
appear after the diameter of the hole to specify the
boring process, as shown in Fig. 6-7.
REAMED HOLE
REAMING is the operation that finishes a hole
to a specific size and required finish. Reaming is
required for precision fits. Reaming follows drilling
or boring to provide a closer tolerance and smoother
finish. A REAMER, a straight or helical multi-fluted

THIS MEANS THIS

---
---r--- i
- - - - - - 01.148

~ --
------- ~
Fig. 6-7. Representation of a bored hole.

66
 Holes

rotary cutting tool is used with a drill press, lathe,
or milling machine to remove a small amount of
material.
A reamed hole is dimensioned the same
as a bored hole. The tolerances and finish
specifications designate the machining process.
The finish specification can be included in the
tolerance block. This method allows the machinist
to use the proper process that makes the hole to
the required specifications. On older drawings, it
is common to find a drill and ream size noted for a
hole. See Fig. 6-8.
that allows a fastener's head to set at or below the
part's surface. Counterdrilling does not require a
noted angle because the drill's angled point shapes
the hole. The typical angle produced by a drill is
120°.
The specifications for a counterdrilled hole
appear on two lines. The first line represents the
small hole and the second line represents the larger
hole. Both lines will have the same information
in the following order: the diameter symbol and
diameter size, the depth symbol and depth size (if
required). See Fig. 6-9.

COUNTERDRILLED HOLE COUNTERSUNK HOLE

COUNTERDRILLING is a two-step process of COUNTERSINKING is the operation of enlarging

drilling a conical shaped hole to a specified depth the entrance of a hole conically to recess the head of

HOLE IS FIRST DRILLED TO

0 .562 A .562 DIA, THEN FINISHED
.578 REAM WITH A REAMER TO .578 DIA.

-~ 0. 578

THIS MEANS THIS

Fig. 6-8. Specification for a reamed hole.

THI S MEANS THIS

t - !)-- --- -
120°0.724 - II - 0.450
I
t -j)- --- --
t

0 .450 THRU
0.724 ~.489
.489
Fig. 6-9. Dimensions for a counterdrilled hole.
67
 Machine Trades Print Reading

a fastener, such as a flat head screw. Countersinking COUNTER BORED HOLE

is the same process as counterdrilling except a
countersunk hole has a specified angle to match
the angle of the fastener's head. The typical angle
used for fasteners is 82°. However, 100° is common
for fasteners on thin materials to provide additional
surface area for fastening.
The specifications for a countersunk hole appear
on two lines. The first line specifies information for
the small hole in the following order: the diameter
symbol and diameter size, the depth symbol and
depth size (if required).
The second line specifies information for the
countersunk hole in the following order: the
countersink symbol (V), the diameter symbol and
diameter size, the "BY" symbol (x) and the angle of
the countersink. See Fig. 6-10.
COUNTERBORING is the operation of
cylindrically enlarging a previously formed hole
to a specific diameter and depth. Counterboring
produces a flat bottom surface. Its purpose is to
provide a recessed hole for fitting fastener heads or
seating bearings and pins.
The specifications for a counterbored hole appear
on two lines. The first line specifies information for
the small hole in the following order: the diameter
symbol and diameter size, the depth symbol and
depth size. The depth's symbol and size are only
included if needed.
The second line specifies information for
the counterbore hole in the following order: the
counterbore symbol (L.J) , the diameter symbol and
diameter size, the depth symbol and depth size.
See Fig. 6-11.

THIS MEANS THIS

t 'r-------
82" 0 .724
t J--------

0.450
V 0.724 X 82"
Fig. 6-10. Current ASME standard for specifying a countersunk hole.

THIS MEANS THIS

-l
f 1-------
0 .880 - - + - -I-- 0.438
~
~------- ­
_J t

~ .380
0.438
LJ 0.880 T.380
Fig . 6-11. Specifications for a counterbored hole.

68
 Holes

SPOTFACE HOLE
SPOTFACING is the operation of providing a
smooth, flat, recessed surface around a hole. A
rough surface, such as a casting, is spotfaced to
accommodate the seating of a washer or bolt head.
Spotfacing also provides a flat seat on an inclined
surface. The machining process for spotfacing and
counterboring are the same, except for the depth
of the spotfaced hole. Spotfacing produces a
shallow recessed hole, approximately 1/16" deep.
The spotface symbol is the same symbol as the
counterbore symbol with "SF" added to it.
The specifications for a spotface hole appear on
two lines. The first line specifies the information for
the small hole in the following order: the diameter
symbol and diameter size, the depth symbol and
depth size (if required).
The second line specifies the information for
the spotfaced hole in the following order: the
spotface symbol (lSFI), the diameter symbol and
diameter size, the depth symbol and depth size.
See Fig. 6-12.

THIS MEANS THIS

1
0. 96 8
L_______ _
I
0.460
I
~
1--------
t

.06 2
0.406
~0.968 T062
Fig. 6-12. A spotface hole is similar to a counterbore, except its depth is shallower than a counterbored hole.

69
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION DRAWING NUMBER PART NUMBER

BROOKFIELD, WISCONSIN 53005 2 42-76-0135

813 2X 0.191
\ 0 ·.812 REAM
V 0.390 X 82'

Tt-
1i T- f---- -+
I
I

I -W r-~
----I--
I
t--
t
.688
-

-
~

"1-
-t
..r
-
-
~

L -$ ~r -
'''1-
-t ~
3:

/ f-II05
Q)
I 1.•/ (')
L.-- =r

---j
~ ~ #3 go.(.2391)
::::I

.....
®
NO SHARP EDGE
1.178
CD

~
C.
o 2.548 HOT ROLLED CD
ON 4 SQ UARE 1/1

2.538 PICKLED AND "

CORN ERS
-
~.

©
::::I
OILED SHEET
:0
STEEL CD
Q)
e:
::::I
co
G
F
E
~-E]- 0
TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED PART NAME
ECCENTRIC COLLAR SCALE 1= 1 C 2 .54~?538 WAS 1357 1-26
.X = ±.10 .xxx = ±.005 2.545 2.540
.xx = ±.01O .xxxx =± .0005 1.105 WAS 1.125; REMOVED
FRACTIONS = ±.01 0 ANGLES = ±1 ' NUMBER 28-50-7559 DATE
8/15 B RADIUS & ADDED NOTE 162 10-10
MACHINED SURFACES 12ijMAX MATERIAL
DRAWN
GROUND SURFACES 3UMAX
DESCRIPTION SEE NOTE BY TJE A NEW PART 8-20
REMOVE BURRS & SHARP EDGES TO .015 CHECKED
DO NOT SCALE
PART NUMBER 42-76-0135 BY R.E.Y. LTR. CHANGE ECO DATE

Fig. 6-13. Eccentric Collar

 Holes

ECCENTRIC COLLAR QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 6-13. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. How far are the two small holes from the vertical centerline 1.
of the large hole?
2. What is the distance between the centers of the two 2.
small holes?
3. What is the maximum length of the part? 3.

4. What is the low limit of the overall length dimension? 4.

5. What is the maximum size of the large hole? 5.

6. How thick is the part's material? 6.

7. What is the minimum width of the part? 7.

8. How far is the vertical centerline of the large hole from 8.

the left edge of the part?
9. What was revision C? 9.

10. How is the large hole made? 10.

11. What is the maximum distance the two small holes can 11.
be spaced from each other?
12. How many corners have a radius? 12.

13. What are the minimum and maximum distances from the 13.
right edge of the small holes to the right side of the part?

14. What is the distance from the part's horizontal centerline 14.
to the horizontal centerline of the upper small hole?
15. What scale is the print? 15.

16. What is the tolerance for three-decimal dimensions? 16.

17. What is the specification for the material of the part? 17.

18. How much tolerance is allowed on the large hole? 18.

19. What is the diameter of the two countersunk holes? 19.

20. What is the angle for the countersunk holes? 20.

71
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION DRAWING NUMBER 1 PART NUMBER

BROOKFIELD, WISCONSIN 53005 2 44-60-0620

0.8125 THRU
LJ 0 1.103
4X 0. 175 4 1.093
.170 I T .007
'----- 2 - - - - .012

L_
~ ~ ! I~~f
B ! [!
- +-- ~-t-+ ~ --+
--: I-- \~
- --+-,
-'- <_

=~-- - =+- _+_ - ,-_ =+,= T--+ -I

1
~, -+-~ I 1
483 :s::
I»
(")
1 TYP. :T
~

t 1]
2
i 1 ] 'I
I I
1
7
1 2.1
16
CD
::;I
I»
.638 fb I a.
CD
"""
I\) .634 ~ C/I

4X 0. 152 "'C
.150

I .. 4~
.638
.634
.638
.634

4X n\. 148
.090 -Jf- -
::::! •
~

::0
CD
I»
a.
16 ~.146 ~
to
I'"
I %
1 ·1
G
F
E
-
~Ej 0
-
TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED I PART NAME
SHOE PLATE SCALE I
1:2 C
.x = ±.10 .XXX = ±.005
.XX= ±.010 .XXXX= ±.0005
FRACTIONS = ±.010 ANGLES = ±1" NUMBER 144-66-0619 DATE 111/15 B
MATERIAL~I----------~------------------r------r------~---+--------------------~----~----~
MACHINED SURFACES 12ijMAX
DESCRIPTION I BLAN K DRAWN I CJC 12-12
GROUND SURFACES 3V
MAX BY A I NEW PART
REMOVE BURRS & SHARP EDGES TO .015
PART NUMBER I 44-66-0620 CHECKED I JRS LTR. CHANGE ECO I DATE
DO NOT SCALE BY

Fig. 6-14. Shoe Plate

 Holes

SHOE PLATE QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 6-14. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What is the specified length of the part? 1. - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2. What is the maximum size for the length of the part? 2. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3. How thick is the part? 3.
4. What size is specified for the large hole? 4. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5. What is the maximum diameter of the large hole? 5. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6. What is the drawing number? 6. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7. How far are the .152/.150 holes from the horizontal 7. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
centerline of the part?
8. How many .152/.150 holes are there? 8. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9. How far are the two .152/.150 holes on the left from 9. - - - - - - - - - -_ __
the two .152/.150 holes on the right from centerpoint to
centerpoint?
10. How far are the two .1751.170 holes on the right from their 10. - - - - - - - - - - -_ _
center points to the vertical centerline of the part?
11. How far are the .175/.170 holes from the horizontal 11. - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ __
centerline of the part?
12. How far are the two .152/.150 holes on the left from 12. - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
the two .175/.170 holes on the left measured from their
vertical centerlines?
13. How far are the two top .148/.146 holes from their 13. - - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ __
centerpoint to the top edge of the part?
14. How far are the two .1481.146 holes on the right from their 14. - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ __
centerpoints to the vertical centerline of the part?
15. How far are the two .175/.170 holes on the left from the 15. - - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ __
two .1751.170 holes on the right?
16. What is the minimum depth of the counterbore? 16. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
17. What is the tolerance for the counterbore diameter? 17. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
18. What is the total number of small drilled holes? 18. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
19. What is the minimum size for the diameter of the 19. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
counterbore?
20. What are the minimum and maximum distances from the 20. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
edge of the .1521.150 holes to the sides of the part?

73
 REVISIONS
REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

AI NEW PART 2/3 I J.E.F.

B
C
4X 0{2 DRILL
13 1
ISFI032T16 2.02~
1.441

02 ~~ r--
L=_
:i:
II)

I
n
-, :::T
I ::J
1------ CD

""'01:>0"
04 .000 0 1.880 t---
I

I
II --
L __
~
II)
a.
CD
UI

L
"tI
I

-
1 ------ ~.
::J
-~
::u

""-.-/
CD
II)

® r--
c__
a.
::J
(Q

o 1.000 BORE
LJ 01 .460 T.33
o
DRAWN BY' DATE : COMPANY.
MB 1/30
G & B DESIGNS
CHECKED BY: DATE:
PARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES R.G. 2/2 FRANKLIN , WISCONSIN
EDGES , BURRS, FLASH AND CLEAN . PART
NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED WITH 1/16 TO .xx = ± .010 .XXX = ± .005 APPROVED BY: J.E.F. IUA rE: 'Lj j TITLE:
1/8 HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS,
BARS, PLATES , ETC. PARTS MAY BE SAW
FRACTIONS = ± .015 ANGLES = ±2° MATERIAL NO
. 1030
ADAPTER PLATE
THIRDA~ECTION ~m~"~:L~:;NUM ''A I-OOOC
CUT AND SANDED UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPEC IFIED . I I'AAMOO" A-475 1 ';"
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SCALE' SHEET:
1 of 1
Fig. 6-16. Adapter Plate
 Holes

ADAPTER PLATE QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 6-15. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What are the maximum and minimum widths of the part? 1.

2. Name the specified material for the part? 2.

3. How deep is the counterbore? 3.

4. What is the maximum size for the largest outside 4.

diameter?
5. What is the minimum width for the 1.880 diameter? 5.

6. What is the scale of the print? 6.

7. What is the unspecified tolerance for fractions? 7.

8. What is the minimum size for the bored hole? 8.

9. How many holes are spotfaced? 9.

10. What is the diameter of the spotfaces? 10.

11. How thick is the flange? 11.

12. What is the unspecified tolerance for angles? 12.

13. Are the spotfaced holes equally spaced? 13.

14. What is the maximum size for the bored hole? 14.

15. On what bolt circle is the 7/32" diameter holes located? 15.

16. Is distance A equal to distance B? 16.

17. How many degrees apart are the spotfaced holes? 17.

18. What is the low limit dimension for Question 17? 18.

19. If the counterbored hole was machined to a depth of 19 .

.325, what would be the length of the bored hole?
20. What is the wall thickness between the counterbore and 20.
the 1.880 diameter?

75
 Unit
THREADS

After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o Describe similarities and differences between
several 60 0 thread forms.
o Recognize a thread designation on an industrial
print.
o Interpret the meaning of thread specifications on
an industrial print.
3. Providing motion or travel (as in the case of
measuring tools).
Threads can be either external (outside), as in
bolts and screws, or internal (inside), as in hexa-
gonal (six-sided) nuts and tapped holes.
THREAD SERIES

Threads and screw threads appear on many
machine shop prints. This unit describes thread
uses, thread series, thread forms, thread specifica-
tions, thread representations, ISO metric threads,
and thread designation.
Threads are available in various series. These
series include coarse threads, fine threads, extra-
fine threads , and constant pitch threads.
COARSE THREADS

THREAD USES Coarse threads are used for general applications.

Threads are used in several situations:
1. Fastening or joining of two or more parts.
2. Conveying power (most commonly found on
machine tools in the form of a lead screw).
UNIFIED (EXTERNAL)
They are specified as UNC (Unified National
Coarse) .
FINE THREADS
Fine threads are used in situations calling for high
strength and vibration resistance. They are specified
as UNF (Unified National Fine).

~P~~ EXTRA-FINE THREADS

Extra-fine threads are used for special applica-

tions, such as thin wall tubing, nuts, or couplings .
Extra-fine threads are specified as UNEF (Unified
National Extra-Fine).
AMERICAN NATIONAL
~ P f-~ CONSTANT PITCH THREADS

Constant pitch threads are also used for special

applications. They are specified as UN, with the
numbers 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 20, 28, or 32 represent-
ing the number of threads per inch.
SHARP
THREAD FORMS

Two of the most common forms (shapes) of

threads used are the UN (Unified National) and the
N (American National) threads, Fig . 7 - 1. These
threads are similar in form, looking like a "V" and
Fig . 7-1 . Thread forms . having an inc luded angle of 60 0 between the sides

76
 Threads

of the thread. The only differences between the
threads are the shape of the tops (crest) and the
shape of the bottom (root) of the threads.
Another form of thread not widely used, but
similar to UN and N threads, is the Sharp V thread,
also shown in Fig. 7-1 .
THREAD SPECIFICATIONS
Various specifications are given, Fig. 7-2, when
representing screw threads on a drawing:
1. Outside diameter of thread (major diameter) .
2. Number of threads per inch.
3 . Thread form (shape or profile of thread).
Example: UN-Unified National.
Thread series (groups of diameter-pitch
combinations differing from each other by
number of threads per inch applied to specific
diameters) .
Example: C-Coarse series.
4. Class fit-Fits range from a loose fit of No.1 to a
tight fit of NO. 3. Fit pertains to how easily a
thread assembles with a mating thread.
Specifications are in reference manuals such
as Machinery's Handbook.
5. External or internal thread - Letter A is used to
represent an external thread. Letter B represents
an internal thread.
6. Right or left-hand thread-Unless designated,
threads are right-handed. When threads are left-
handed, the letters LH are added at the end of
the thread designation.
THREAD REPRESENTATIONS
Screw threads are represented on a drawing by
different methods. See Fig. 7-3.
TAPPED HOLES
A threaded hole is represented on a print as
shown in Fig. 7-4. The depth of thread (7/8 in.) is
indicated in the sectioned view .
ISO METRIC THREADS
Metric screw thread standards were established
by the International Organization for Standardiza-
tion (ISO) in 1949.

-3 -10 UNC-2 A
EX TERNAL THREAD

CLASS OF FIT

THREAD FORM
AND SERIES
UNIFIED
(NATIONAL )
(COARSE )

NUMBER OF THREADS PER INCH

OUTS IDE DIA METER OF THREAD

Fig . 7 -2 . Thread specifications.

S IIIIIIIIIIII~
2--------]
-------------

SCHEMATIC SIMPLIFIED

Fig. 7 - 3 . Thread representation .

77
 Machine Trades Print Reading

3
8-16 UNC-2B
~ DEEP

I: :I
II II
II II
II II ,750
II II
II II
II II
~ - +- - ~
~t)

SECTION
VIEW'
Fig , 7-4, Threaded hole,

METRIC THREAD SERIES
There are three series of metric threads:
1, ISO metric coarse pitch,
2, ISO metric fine pitch,
3, ISO metric constant pitch,
Although ISO metric and Unified share the
same thread form of 60°, they are not inter-
changeable due to slight differences in diameters
and pitches,
METRIC THREAD USE
ISO metric coarse pitch threads are in common
use on fasteners, ISO metric fine pitch threads are
chiefly used on precision measuring tools and in-
struments, The ISO metric constant pitch series is
found on machine parts and all spark plugs,
THREAD DESIGNATION
Designations for all ISO metric threads begin with
the capital letter "M," Next, the basic major
diameter is specified in millimeters, An "x" follows;
then, finally, the pitch is specified in millimeters , See
Fig, 7-5,
When designating coarse series threads, the pitch
is omitted, For example: A 16 mm coarse series
thread with a pitch of 2 mm would be simply
designated M 16. The same diameter thread in the
fine series would be designated M 16 x 1.5.

78
 Threads

M16
METRIC DIA . (mm)

S111111111111~
M8

5 1IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIiIlilm

METRIC DIA. (mm) x PITCH (mm)

M16 x 1.5

b111111111111~
Fig. 7-5. Metric thread designation .

This vertical milling machine has two levels of computer-assisted numerical control programming . The first workpiece
is machined by manual operation. Next, machining coordinates are entered and recorded in memory. Then, succeeding
parts are machined automatically . (Bridgeport Machines, A Division of Textron, Inc .)

79
 5/8

R. 118 Typ.
13/81
, I , 1 I-- .252
I .240

(Xl
"-
(V)

__ --.L '<1"
"-
OIL{)
\0'<1"
(V) 00
~~

bmzl~
s:DJ
n
:::r
:S'
.4075 CD
Q:)A065
R. 11/32
...-i
REAM DJ
c..
(Xl CD
o rn
10-32 UNF -2B ..."'C
2 HOLES ...
:S'
::c
CD
DJ
c..
:S'
CARBURIZE PER ES12-2000 .015-.020 ec
TEMPER PER ES12-3000

TOL. UNLESS SPECIFIED PARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP EDGES, BURRS, FLASH
AND CLEAN. PART NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED "'ITH 1/16 TO
DECIMALS ± .005
1/8 HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS, BARS, PLATES, ETC.
f3620 STEEL FRACTIONS ±1I64
PARTS MAY BE SA'" CUT AND SANDED UNLESS DTHER"'ISE
ANGLES ± 112" SPECIFIED.

TITLE ASSEMBL Y D"'G. NO.

D
DR. SCALE
c
2X
B
A 30-10-1020
FRANKLIN, W'ISCDNSIN
No. 'w'AS DATE IAPP'D
PART NO.
Fig. 7-6. Bearing Support Block.
 Threads

DIRECTIONS - QUIZ QUESTIONS

1. The industrial prints in this section will test your print reading ability.
2. Study the views, dimensions, title block, and notes in Figs. 7-6 through 7-10.
3. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

BEARING SUPPORT BLOCK QUIZ

1. What size is the reamed hole? 1.

2. What tolerance is given for the reamed hole? 2.
3. What is the distance between the two tapped holes? 3.
4. What size are the two threaded holes? 4.
5. How far is the bottom threaded hole from the horizon- 5.
tal centerline of the reamed hole?
6. What is the height of the workpiece? 6.
7. What is the maximum length allowed on the 7.
workpiece?
8. What is the minimum length allowed on the 8.
workpiece?
9. What scale is the print? 9.
10. What material is used for the workpiece? 10.
11. What is the minimum thickness of the workpiece? 11 .
12. What is the maximum thickness allowed for the 12.
workpiece?
13. What tolerance is allowed on three-place decimal 13.
dimensions?
14. What fit is called for on the threaded holes? 14.

15. To what depth is the workpiece carburized? 15.

16. Have there been any print revisions? 16.
17. What radii are given on the print? 17.
18. Which one is an inside radius (fillet)? 18.
19. What is the thread series for the small holes? 19.
20. What heat treatment is performed according to 20.
ES 12-3000?

81
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION I2 106-9 2, 1400
0

I
DRA G NO .

13135 W E ST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD . WISCONSIN 53005

1 X 45° CJ4AM. 3
8 BOTH ENDS 4-'OUNC7
,
~

-
1'\
/-:~
- - - - +
1
I-

1\ /
~
-- .-;'
~
~

~I~ I [!] .1. ,

I--
III
n
:J
:;'
a ~

..
-l
+J.. III
a.
00
N
8-'~ ~
en
..
"tJ

...s·
:l:I
~
III
a.
::::J
to
,

CADMIUM PLA.TE. PER - ES-7-1.4

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIEO F
FI N ISH SPEC I F ICAT IONS E
MA CH IN ED SU RFACES l o / MAX . 0
GROUND SURFACES o/MAX .
VACUUM c
DECIMAL TOL XX! 0 10 XXX.!. 005XXXX .!. 0005
PART NAME
PAD STUD S CALE FULL B
FRACTION TOL. !. 010
ANGLE TOl ..!:. , 0 M ATE RIAL
NUMB E R 08-,5- 0010 D ATE
4'19 A

REMOVE BURRS ANO SHARP EDGES TO 015 MAX DESC RIPTION CO ....T. THREAD STOCK D RAWN
BY G,.A.? lUI. ItJEW PART f<E.LE.A$I:.D ~ ~/~5
DO NOT SCALE
- ~--
PAR T NUMBER 06-92-1400 C HE CKE D
BY
--
C HANG E
~------ - - - -
ECO DATE

B I P INC.

Fig . 7 -7 . Va c uum Pad Stud.

 Threads

VACUUM PAD STUD QUIZ

1. What is the scale of the print? 1.

2. What two views are shown on the print? 2.
3. What size are the two chamfers on the workpiece? 3.
4. What does" 1 A" mean when referring to threads? 4.
5. What does UNC signify? 5.
6. How long are the threads on each end of the 6.
workpiece?
7. What kind of thread representation is shown on the 7.
print?
8. Who drew the print? 8.
9. What is the material number? 9.
10. How many threads per inch is the thread? 10.
11. What is the high limit on the overall length? 1 1.
1 2. What diameter is the stud? 1 2.
13. What operation is performed according to ES-7-1 .4? 13.
14. What is the material description? 14.
1 5. What tolerance is given on the length of the stud? 1 5.
16. What is the value of dimension [2J ? 16.
1 7. What class fit is the thread? 1 7.
18. What print change was made? 18.
1 9. What is the part number of the workpiece? 1 9.
20. What is the diameter of the thread? 20.

83
 I
MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD. WISCONSIN 53005
IDRA;;G NO .
A

14 2-;2-0120

9
/~ -/8 UNF
© @
12. X 4Et CUAM. ¢ .192.
.187
®@~ ¢ .480 r-- ¢.562 ~ DIA. STOCK
.4'75 .5S8

d ~
'
I

" -11111111111111111,11111111- - tf
-
-~
+ ---+-
-7
s:

5' I' ~/ __ J~/L

III
(')
~

-~I ~
:::I
LLI--
t!:/7 rv 14 CD

FULL 1 l-
...-I
III
(Xl
.j:>.
t:; TI-II2£AI? L:!J 2.
Co
CD
CJ)

"'C
:!.
5.330 ....
:::I

5.345 © ::c
CD
III
Co
:r
CO
NOTf:. ~
ALL D/A~'5 MUST BE CDNCENTRIC TO <E-
WITI-IIN .005 To 1.12.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED G

FINISH SPECIFICATIONS F

MACHINED SURFACES 'o/MAX E WAS .500/.495 -- 431'112

GROUND SURFACES ~AX PART NAME LOCKING BOLT SCALE I .:1'= r 0 WAS !t1~ CI4AMfER \4315',25
DECIMAL TOl XX + 0 10 XXX, 005 XXXX· 0005 __ -- --- C WAS 5 318 I4b 5/14 J
FRACTIONTOl' 010 I NUMBER 108-62-1230 DATE /-15 B WAS ~~ DRILL 813/19
ANGLE TOl .. 1° MATERIAL .13 L
REMOVE BURRS AND SHARP EDGES TO 015 MAX DESCRIPTIO"I ¢,{STRESSPROCF STL DR:::N ~ _ A WAS .510;'506 ~51/2~
C HECKEDi roo __
DO NOT SCALE PART NUMBER 42-32-0/20 BY ~.
CHANGE ECOI OATE

B I P INC.

Fig. 7 -8. Locking Bolt .

 Threads

LOCKING BOLT QUIZ

1. What size hole is drilled in the workpiece? 1.

2. What is the largest outside diameter? 2.
3. How much tolerance is given on the overall length of 3.
the workpiece?
4. What print change was made at ® ? 4.
5. What size radius is specified on the print? 5.
6. How long is the thread? 6.
7. What size is the thread diameter? 7.
8. What does UNF mean? 8.
9. What did ECO 46 specify? 9.
10. What material is the workpiece? 10.
11. What is the low limit on the smallest outside diameter? 11.
1 2. What is the value of dimension [2] ? 1 2.
1 3. What are the minimum and maximum allowable diameters 1 3.
for the main body?
14. What is the width of the locking bolt head? 14.
15. How far is the drilled hole from the right end of the 15.
workpiece?
16. What is the scale of the print? 16.
1 7. What was the original size of the smallest outside 1 7.
diameter?
18. How concentric must the diameters be to the 18.
centerline of the workpiece?
1 9. What is the low limit on the bolt head length 1 9.
dimension?
20. What is the tolerance for the 5/8 length dimension? 20.

85
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD . WISCONSIN 53005
1 4 !4S 0
ORA G NO
T
• 4-0140

1.

1--

, ,
F DRILL s:

~
Q)
o
~
::I
CD

...-I
Q)
(Xl Rl
8 ~9~ STOCK 0-
CD
en 16 DIA. IJl

...5'-a
¢ .375 ...
.:no .3 ::a
8 - (6 UNC CD
Q)
0-
5'
(Q
CADMIUM PLATE

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED G

FINISH SPECIFICATIONS F
MACHIN ED SURF ACES l~A X . E
GROUND SURFACES o/'MAX .
DECIMAL TOl xX t- 0 10 XXX ! 005 XXXX • 0005
P .. RT NA~E T·
" ..
STPP SCREW BOpy S C .. LE FULL rc
D
I I I
FRACT ION TOL "' 0 10
ANGLE TOL. .. 1°

REMOVE BURRS ANO SHARP EDGES TO 015 MAX

.I. TERI .. LII -
_ _+ OB - 17- 0920
NUMBER

I~
¢ ib
DESCRIPTION C.D. leLI4
D .. TE

OR::IN
7-4
Cb
B

A
I I I
DO NOT SCALE PART NUMBER 45-04-0140 C HEBCyKEO k 1 R 6 . CHANGE EcOI DATE

Fig. 7 -9. "T" -Stop Screw Body .

 Threads

"T" -STOP SCREW BODY QUIZ

1. What material number is specified for the part? 1.

2. What size is the large diameter of the workpiece? 2.
3. What two views are shown on the print? 3.
4. What kind of line is line [2] ? 4.
5. What size fillet is specified on the print? 5.
6. What size hole is called for on the print? 6.
7. Does the hole go through the workpiece? 7.
8. How long is the thread (including the chamfer)? 8.
9. How far is the hole located from the shoulder of the 9.
workpiece?
1 O. What material is the workpiece? 1 O.
11. What is the part number of the print? 11.
1 2. How long is the 3/8 diameter? 1 2.
13. What is the value of dimension 0 ? 13.
14. What is the high limit on the small diameter? 14.
1 5. What is the distance from the edge of the drilled hole to 1 5.
the left end of the workpiece? (See Conversion Chart on
page 229 for diameter of "F" drill.)

1 6. What size radius is specified on the end of the 1 6.

workpiece?
1 7 . What finish material is specified for the workpiece? 17 .
18. What size thread is called for on the print? 1 8.
1 9. What is the maximum length allowed on the 9/16 19.
diameter?
20. What size chamfer is specified on the print? 20.

87
 1- 86 -I

1--16--

--l 1--5

.3><45°, I .l~
\j ~[ o
t s:
III
(")
:r

~
::J

T
CD
-i
....
III
c..
GO CD
GO C/)

\0 'R
"C
....
(.\j s·
~

'R :ll
CD
MlfO-1.5 III
c..
s·
co
4140 STEEL
f METR\C
METRIG TOL. UNLESS SPECIFIED PARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP EDGES. BURRS. FLASH
AND CLEAN. PART NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED WITH 1/16 TO
± .005
TOLERANCES DECIMALS
FRACTIONS ± 1/64
1/8 HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS. BARS. PlATES. ETC.
PARTS MAY BE SAW CUT AND SANDED UNLESS OTHERWISE
DIMENSIONS ±.5 ANGLES ± 2· SPECIFIED.

ANGLES ± .50 TinE ASSEMBLY DWG. NO.

D
ADJUSTING BOLT
C D~ ~2iTE ICHECKED DATE ,PPfIOYEDl DATE In MM

B
PART NO.
A G & B DESIGNS
No. WAS DATE IAP'YD FRANKLIN, WISCONSIN 40-12-142
Fig. 7-10. Adjusting Bolt.
 Threads

ADJUSTING BOLT QUIZ

1. What is the high limit on the largest diameter? 1.

2. What is the low limit on the total length of the 2.
workpiece?
3. What is the scale of the print? 3.
4. What tolerance is specified for angles on a metric 4.
print?
5. What is the length of the threaded portion of the bolt? 5.
6. What is the pitch of the thread? 6.
7. Is the thread coarse or fine? 7.
8. What is the width of the groove on the bolt? 8.
9. What is the part number of the workpiece? 9.
10. What is the distance from the surface of the flat to 10.
the outside diameter of the shoulder on the bolt head?
11. What is the diameter of the groove? 11 .
12. How deep is the groove from the 26 mm diameter? 12.
13. What material is the workpiece? 13.
14. What is the diameter of the thread? 14.
15. What is the length of the bolt head? 15.
1 6. What tolerance is specified for the width of the 1 6.
groove?
17. Does the print specify a part number? 17.
18. What is the distance from the top of the bolt head to 18.
the bottom of the 26 mm diameter collar?
19. What thread chamfer is specified? 19.
20. What is the distance from the outside of the collar 20.
diameter to the thread diameter?

89
 -, ~ .
•r. '"
.. y
.... t .1>

..
~
t i ...
t I ~ ,.
~I ~
."
,....
Unit "
Er l'

~E<eNTOURS .j

8 r "'-1
l
L~<'"
8'
.~

~-~ " 1 -I- ~ t.t T f ,,'r tJ t

~l
..j ~~,.
r- ~ _I t ~,
~
I
. '. . . c~ .... . ,'. '( .'
I . I
I
I' I
~ J..-. ... J

After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o Define a circle, arc, and contour.
o Know the difference between a fillet and a
round.
o Identify the size of a fillet, round , or contour.
o Explain blend radius and tangent.
o Calculate distances using radii dimensions.
A CONTOUR is a curved outline of an object
that has a shape other than a circle. In order to
understand contours, you first need to understand
the elements of a circle. A CIRCLE is an edge that
loops 360° around a center point at a fixed distance
to form a closed curve . See Fig. 8-1, A. A diameter
determines the size of a circle. DIAMETER is the
distance of a circle's center axis from outer edge
to outer edge. Refer to Fig. 8-1, A. RADIUS is the
distance from a circle's or an arc's center point
to its outer edge. The radius of a circle is 1/2 the
length of its diameter, as shown in Fig. 8-1 , B. The
CIRCUMFERENCE of a circle is the distance around
its closed curve starting at a point and ending at the
same point. See Fig. 8-1, B.
ARCS
An ARC is any curved edge with a constant
radius that has an angle less than 360°, as shown
in Fig. 8-2. Arcs are dimensioned with leaders and
radii. On a drawing, a leader identifies an arc while

CIRCLE

90
0 J CIRCUMFERENCE

RADIUS

-
DIAMETER
0

135 .......
----
I " ~\ (STARTATC
1
0 I
180 \ t
\
~ /
/ ~ENDATC
0

225

CENTER POINT CENTER POINT

A B

Fig. 8-1 . Geometry of a circle. A-Diameter is the center axis of a circle, as shown by the line that starts at point A, goes through
center point B, and ends at point C. The angles of a circle start at 0° on point C and increase counterclockwise to a full revolution
of 360°. B-Radius starts at center point B and ends at point C. Circumference is the length of a circle's edge starting at point C
and ending at point C.

90
 Contours

ARC

9U
0

135 RADIUS

R6.027
/
CENTER POINT

Fig. 8-2. An arc is defined by its radius and angle. The radius
is the distance between points Band C. The angle determines
the arc length , or distance along the arc from A to C.

the radius indicates the arc's size. A radius is noted

by the radius symbol (R), followed by its size. Most Fig. 8-4. The break lines indicate the radi i origins are outside
of the drawing area.
radii have a defined origin, as shown in Fig . 8-3. A
radius dimensioned with a break line indicates the
origin is outside the drawing area. See Fig. 8-4.
POINTS OF TANGENCY
Some parts have blend radii. A BLEND RADIUS
is a curve that is tangent to other lines or arcs.
TANGENT means the edge of a contour or line
touches another curved surface at one point. A
blend radius joins curved contours to lines, arcs, or
other contours as smoothly as possible to form a
surface or closed edge. See Fig. 8-5.

FILLETS

A FILLET is a radius applied to the inside corner POINTS OF TANGENCY

of a part. A fillet can increase a part's strength and

R.625

R.500 2X R.875

Fig. 8-5. The contours are tangent to each other, each

blending to form a multiple curved edge or surface .

1.220 improve its appearance. A fillet is specified by the

L ~I------+-_~
size of its radius, as shown in Fig. 8-6. A general
note can also specify a fillet. See Fig. 8-7.

-j .500 .62 5 f- ROUNDS

A ROUND is a radius applied to the outside

Fig . 8-3. The linear dimensions locate the origins of the radii edge or corner of a workpiece. Rounding edges or
while the rad ii dimensions define the size of the arcs. corners improve a part's appearance. Rounding also
91
 Machine Trades Print Reading

ROUND

NOTE:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL
+ ROUNDS AND FILLETS = R 1/8
FILLET

NOTE:
R.25
ALL RADII ARE R.06 UNLESS
+ OTHERWISE NOTED.

R.38 (TYP)
Fig. 8-6. Dimensioning fillets and rounds . Fig. 8-7. General notes specify sizes of radi i.

OTHER CONTOURS

removes sharp edges that are subject to breakage. Not all contours are arcs. A contour can be a
Just like a fillet, a radius determines the size. Refer curved surface without a radius. When a radius does
to Fig. 8-6. A general note can also specify a round. not apply, baselines, datums, points, or coordinates
Refer to Fig. 8-7. define the curved edges. See Fig. 8-8.

BASELINES

T
2.80
t t 1 .79
t 2.19
! 12~9
2.48

.56
1 ----'-1.29
.70

1.70
1---- 2.24 - --.l
1--- - 2.80 -----1
~--- 3.36 ----..-j

~---- 3. 91----~
Fig. 8-8. The contour of th is part does not have a radius. Coordinates measured from baselines define the contour.

92
 Contours

CORD SET HOUSING QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 8-9. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. List the various radii found on the workpiece. 1.

2. Determine dimension A. 2.

3. What name is given to the R.12 corners? 3.

4. What kind of material is used to produce the workpiece? 4.

5. Determine dimension B. 5.

6. What is the height of the part? 6.

7. What is the largest radius specified for the part? 7.
8. Determine dimension C. 8.
9. How many holes does the casting require? 9.
10. In what condition was the material received? 10.
11. What is the tolerance for two-place decimal dimensions? 11.
12. How many surfaces are shown in the top view? 12.
13. Determine distance D. 13.
14. What is the acceptable maximum height of the part? 14.
15. What scale is the print? 15.

REVISIONS

t
4\ :;).234

-.- I 1
I~OTE
RECEIVED AS ROUGi-I C,~STING

13 7:5 1.750
I I I

~ __ " "+ I :

'{' :-'-' t 2)0 I

I:]--J L---2250~~ 1 250

-----::IJ---i
R '2 (TYP) K.25

'~~ R.CG (TYP) R06 (TYP)

UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES
.X/X ~ i.OOS .xx ~ i 015 .x ~ i.050 CO.RO SET HOUSING
M'CHINE FINISH I:§"MAI ANGLES ~ ±r
(:HECKEDBY JR
CONCENTRICiTY 005 TIR REMOVE ALL BURRS PART NO
SQU,I.,I\ENESS .001 PER IN 00 NOT SCALE DRAvV:I\jG

Fig. 8-9. Cord Set Housing.

93
 REVISIONS
REV I DESCRIPTION APPROVEO

A I ADDED PAINT FINISH-PAINlS-3048 J.R.

1& PAINTED BY DUMORE

FINISH: PAINT S-3048 #
l j-0
3:
QI
n
::r
¢4.110 :::J
R.125 ¢3.730 ~
::;t
QI

to
-'="
rn:J Q.
~
fIl

"
--- f ---
-
:!.
:::J
R.625
JJ
~
QI
1.00 Q.
:::J
(C

~
.38:!::~g

3X ¢.203

T~~~e1[~W~?gt~~ the ~ DUMORE CORPORAliON

.--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -i Ru~~~l ~g[pg~atian. ~ 1300 17TH STREET, RACINE, WI 53403
I UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES repraduc~d or nn.E

.XXX = ±.005 .XX = ±.015 .X = ±.050 ~~Rt~~ ~~~~~ision. PLATE -WHEEL GUARD
IMTERIAl:
MACHINE FINISH 1~X ANGLES = ±r STAMPING
.0593 C.R. STEEL
SHEET B
CONCENTRICI1Y .005 TIR
USE: SERIES 44 RECEIVED AS: RS-658-0169 SQUARENESS .001 PER IN. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING BREAK SHARP CORNERS

Fig. 8-10. Plate-Wheel Guard.

 Contours

PLATE-WHEEL GUARD QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 8-10. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What is the part number? 1. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2. What is revision A? 2. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3. What is dimension A? 3.
4. How many holes are in the part? 4. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5. What type of tolerance is used on the .38 dimension? 5. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6. What is the outside diameter of the part? 6. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7. Name the material specified for the part. 7. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8. What is dimension B? 8. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9. What is radius R.125 called? 9. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
10. How many degrees is C? 10. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
11. What is the distance for O? 11. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12. What is the maximum acceptable size on the 1.00 12. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
dimension?
13. How far are the holes from the center of the depression? 13.
14. What tolerance is required on angles? 14.
15. What process is used for producing the part? 15. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
16. List the radii found on the part. 16. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
17. Are the three holes equally spaced on a circle? 17. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
18. What note is given regarding scale? 18. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
19. What information is found on the print regarding corners? 19. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20. What tolerance is required on three-place decimal 20. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
dimensions?

95
 REVISIONS
REV DESCRIPTION APPROVED

A I RELEASED J.R.S

1/2 HEX X 3/32 DEEP

CAST -IN

.750 I-
f - .375
R.1562
.343

R.250
0.312 THRU R.875

I 2.328
:l:
II)
c - -+---
2.318
n
~

R1.25 :i"
CD
I 1.164 ~
I II)
1.159 Q.
R.3125
--1--
CD CD
0) en
I
"
-
I ::!.
::l

:D
CD
0 .1875 II)
I .. I BI . 1 Q.
::l
(Q
NOTES:
1. PART TO BE PAINTED FLAT BLACK
REFER TO ES-7 -1.5 FOR SURFACE PREPERATION
2. ROUNDS & FILLETS R.06 UNLESS NOTED

DRAWN BY:
RVS
DATE:
5-20
COMPANY:
MILWAUKEE
J.R.S. DATE: ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
CHECKED BY
7-5 BROOKFIELD , WISCONSIN 53005
APPROVED BY'
.X = ± .10
DATE .
.XXX = ± .005 TITLE .
REMOVE ALL BURRS AND
.XX = ± .010
FRACTIONS = ±.01 0
.xXXX = ±.0005
AN GLES = ±1 °
BREAK SHARP CORNERS TO .015 MAX. MATERIAL NO: HANDLE RING
FIRST AN GLE PROJECTI ON MATERIAL DESCRIPTION : SB
E
I CAGE CODE r RAWINGNO .. REV
MACHINED SURFACES 12ijMAX
28-82-0160 A
GROUND SURFACES 3VMAX -E]~ CAST IRON SCALE:
1:1 I WEIGHT'
1
I SHEET:

Fig. 8-11 . Handle Ring .

 Contours

HANDLE RING QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 8-11. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. list the size of the smallest diameter hole. 1. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2. How deep is the hex counterbore? 2. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3. Determine dimension A. 3.
4. What size is the part's largest radius? 4.
5. What is the maximum acceptable distance between the 5. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
two holes on the part?
6. Determine distance B. 6. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7. What is the part number? 7. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8. list all the radii contained on the part. 8.
9. What is the tolerance on the 2.328/2.318 dimension? 9.
10. What color is the casting painted? 10. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
11. Determine dimension C. 11.
12. How thick is the casting? 12.
13. What material is used to make the part? 13.
14. What two views are shown on the print? 14. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
15. How far is the .1875 diameter hole from the center of the 15. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
part?
16. Determine dimension D. 16. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
17. What is the maximum acceptable size for the .343 17.
dimension?
18. How is the 1/2" hex counterbore made? 18.
19. What size are unspecified fillets and rounds? 19.

20. Determine dimension E. 20.

97
 1 2 1 3 I 4 ~ 5 I 6 1 7 I 8
ORIGINAL DIMENSIONS CLASSIFICATION TABLE
FOR DESIGN '" DRAWING

L?~~~NI ~ If) 101~

CHARACTERISTIC
TOOL REFFERENCE
- OR- COMMENT
DIMENSION
A
IQ1] .031 t .005 .040 t.0015
MATERIAL NOTE F6 x

~ 4~00~0~1-~400~-~1~1~ 1-~~~1I~==r=]
-

B
~
~.I -
1R...!c.0~2:::::±~.-
T ----&-;;;:::IQ1]D:;---=
1=.135+.
003
-.000
0-1--!----,L/r- R.005 MAX .
~
I3l
~
45 TO 52 RC
__________

R.015 I A /~ R.063 P=PERFORMANCE. F=m. A=ASSEMBLY (USE WITH SYMBOL)

X=IDENTIFIES APPUCABLE CLASSIFICATIONS
o
- 0= REQUIRED BY ENGINEERING AND/OR MANUFACTURING f--
MIN.
.281 tt t @=STRICT CONFORMANCE TO SPECIFICATION REQUIRED AND IS NOT
NEGOTIABLE (MAY BE REQUIRED BY REGULATORY AGENCY)

c
- .562 L . 195

- - -',",<c---L--
.390 GENERAL NOTES:
1. ALL UNSPECIFIED RADII I--- ~
III

y
R.250 \ :::> TO BE .015 MAX . n
~
::l
D CD
.156+. 000 ]
-.005 .359 ~
CD
.... I-
Q.
CD
I/)
co
".
±.01~ -
~
E
.067 - ::l
R.02
:c
~1Q1]
-
CD
III
- f-- Q.
::l
CO
PLATE PER:
- 04 B THIS DRAWING -03
F
f-- .220 - - f- 40001-051-16

~
HEAT TREAT: 45-52 RC
-03 B THIS DRAWING - 02 PER: 40001-521-01

~
RADIUS PER:
-02 B THIS DRAWING -01 4000 1-400-11
- -01 B
.040 t .0015 C.R.C. SPG. STEEL SOFT ANLD
NONE I---
ANSI-Cl095
PART
NO.
CHG.
LTR. MATERIAL ~ SURFACE TREATMENT

G REFERENCES DI MEN SIO N SAPPLyB EFORESURFAC ETREATMEN

DIM~ES
----
REVISION
TOLERANC ESU NLESSO THERWI SESPEC IFIED
_ -~~ I ± _-XX~~5 ±
AUTHORIZATION X~ .,.2 ± XXX~.,.5 ±
ANGLES .,.i+
DRAWING: DET01
-
1
2 1 3508
3508A ALLENB RADLEY
",ROC KWEU.lNTERNATIONAj.C OMPANY
BEARING PLATE
MILWAUK EE WI SC ONSIN
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL GROUP
CAD DOCUMENT SPEC IAj.EOUIP MENJDIVISION
BULLETIN 800T
H MAKE ALL REVISIONS ON CAD DRAWN BY, K.N./C.J.B. I DArr, 11 -01 SCALE, 4,1 l SHEET, 1 OF 1
DATABASE AND REPLOT DRAWING

~E IPERM.CN.40265. 139.2 40265

I CHECKED BY, R.B.
APPROVED BY, J .M.
IDArr, 11 -22
DArr, 11 -22
I :~
B
40265 - 139
I I I t I I
Fig. 8-12. Bearing Plate.
 Contours

BEARING PLATE QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 8-12. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What is the length (measured left to right) of the part? 1. - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2. What was the original radius prior to R.02? 2. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3. What material is used to make the part? 3. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4. What hardness is specified for heat treatment? 4.
5. Where is Allen-Bradley located? 5.
6. What is the drawing number? 6.
7. What is the maximum thickness of material allowed to 7. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
manufacture the part?
8. How long is the .156" wide tab (disregarding fillets)? 8.
9. How long is the .130" wide tab (disregarding fillets)? 9.
10. What is the size of the smallest radius on the part? 10.
11. What does the diamond symbol with the letter "P" inside 11.
represent?
12. What does the number "2" located within a triangle 12.
symbol indicate?
13. What tolerance is used for three-place decimals? 13. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
14. What is the size of the largest radius shown on the part? 14. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
15. What radius is found on the corners of the .135" wide 15.
projection?
16. What specification number relates to the heat treat 16.
specifications?
17. What is the overall height of the workpiece? 17.
18. What is the lowest acceptable size for the .156" 18.
dimension?
19. What is the file name? 19.
20. What does the abbreviation ANLD mean? 20.

99
 REVISIONS
REV DESCRIPTION ECO# DATE APPROVED

A NEW RELEASE 135 12720 J.R.S

8 R.187 WAS R.093 1400 10/26 J.R.S
.------------------,- MIN. DRAFT ON C R.031 WAS R.046 393 12726 J.R.S
THESE SURFACES 0 ADDED +.031 -0 1518 1/3 J.R.S
E

NOTE: R.0625 (TYP.) EXCEPT WHERE

SHOWN

'M81B; 1~ q~83~
·750 ~

....o
~~
.0625 I

R250~=~j~~=
,
-f I r-

v
.0625

---1 f--- . 125

r R.031 ©
U
.291
T ---+--l-
1 -j

F-=='F=
.375

0.332
s::
III
(")
:T
:::J
CI)

~
III
a.
CI)
til
o
I R.250 f 1.135
"'C

-
:::!.
.875 1.125 :::J

-.-~----
W87
jJ ___ ~ __ ~ ____._8fL5____~~
--t---+--
lJ
CI)
III
9:
:::J
(Q

o 1.813 ~b031
,
02.50-./ ~ I @
t

I IDRAWN BY: IDATE: COMPANY:

MILWAUKEE
A.A. 6-6
CHECKED BY: J.R.S. IDATE : ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
7-6 BROOKFIELD , WISCONSIN 53005
APPROVED BY' IDATE'
.X " ±.10 .XXX " ± .005 TITLE:
REMOVE ALL BURRS AND
.XX" ± .0 10 .xxxx" ±.0005 BREAK SHARP CORNERS TO .015 MAX. MATERIAL NO: CLAMPING COLLAR
FRACTIONS" ±.010 ANGLES"
MACHINED SURFACES 12ijMAX
±1° THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
~
380 ALUM
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION: E
Si3 TCAGECODE I
DRAWING NO.: 28-82-0140 1 ROV
GROUND SURFACES 3VMAX ~ SCALE: 1:1 I
WEIGHT. ISHEET: 6

Fig. 8-13. Clamping Collar.

 Contours

CLAMPING COLLAR QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 8-13. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What material is used to make the part? 1.

2. List all the radii noted for the part. 2.

3. Unless otherwise specified, what are the fractional 3.

tolerances?
4. What size hole goes through both sides of the part? 4.

5. What is the width of the part? 5.

6. What is the center distance between the two holes? 6.

7. What is the size of the largest diameter on the part? 7.

8. What scale is the print? 8.

9. What is the length of the smallest hole? 9.

10. What ECO number designated revision B? 10.

11. What is the high limit size of the large diameter hole? 11.

12. What is the wall thickness between the large diameter 12.
hole and the outside diameter of the part?

13. Which two dimensions give the location of the small 13.
diameter hole?
14. What is the width of the slot that splits the clamping 14.
collar?
15. What is the drawing number? 15.

16. What distance is the face of the .125 flat to the vertical 16.
centerline of the part?
17. What is the tolerance for the .875/.865 dimension? 17.

18. What size are the radii not specified on the print? 18.

19. What specific change happened in revision C? 19.

20. List the three views on the drawing. 20.

101
 Unit
SECTIONAL VIEWS
9
After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o Explain the terms : sectional view , cutting plane
line, and section lines .
o Identify various section lines .
o Complete various sectional views.
o Identify sectional views such as: Full, Half,
Revolved, Removed, and Broken-out.
A SECTIONAL VIEW of an object in a drawing is
created by the imaginary cutting away of its front
portion to reveal its interior . The exposed (cut) sur-
face, then , is emphasized by the use of SECTION
LINES (cross-hatching). See Fig. 9-1.
/"
/"
Fig. 9 - 1 . Sectioned v iew shows how imag inary cutting plane cuts away front portion of part to revea l interi or detail s .
102
WORKING WITH SECTIONAL VIEWS
The use of sectional views is a graphic method
of exposing the interior details of a workpiece . It
is an effective way of showing inside features that
would be complicated or confusing if described en-
tirely by hidden lines. A sectional view may serve
as one of the principal views-front , top, or side-
on a print, or it can be used as an additional view.
A sectional view is developed by first passing an
imaginary CUTTING PLANE through the workpiece.
Then, the part of the workpiece nearest the
"reader" is removed , thereby revealing a direct and
clear view of the interior shape. See Fig . 9 - 1 .
/"
/"
 Sectional Views

CUTTING PLANE LINE
The location of the imaginary cutting plane is
indicated by a heavy line called a CUTTING PLANE
LINE, Fig. 9 - 2. The ends of the cutting plane line
are bent at 90 0 with arrowheads on the ends that
point in the direction of viewing sight . The side of
the workpiece toward the arrows is the side that
will be sectioned. The position of the cutting plane
line on the part will determine the type of section-
ing (full , half, revolved , removed, or broken-out).
When two or more sectional views are shown on
a print, letters are placed at each end of the cut-
ting plane line. These letters match the letters
shown directly below the sectional view identified
with that cutting plane line . See Fig. 9 - 2.
Several types of cutting plane lines are used on
industrial prints . Examples are shown in Fig. 9-3 .

A A

ARROWS INDICATE
DIRECTION OF VIEW
CUTTl NG- PLAN E
LINE

SECTION LINES

SECTION A- A
Fig . 9 -2 . Location of cutting plane in top view is indicated by a heavy cutting plane line marked A -A . Sectioned view
below is identified as Section A -A .

A t _______________ J
Fig. 9-3. Examples of various cutting plane lines.
A

103
 Machine Trades Print Reading

SECTION LINES FULL SECTIONS

SECTION LINES (cross-hatch lines) are used to
identify and emphasize the surfaces that have been
cut and exposed by a cutting plane line.
Section lines are thin, parallel, slanted lines,
usually drawn at an angle of 45°, Fig . 9-4.
However, if the section lines become parallel with
part of the section outline , then they must be drawn
at some other angle (usually 30 ° or 60°). Both poor
practice and preferred method are shown in Fig. 9 -5.
When it becomes necessary to show different
kinds of materials (on assembly prints, for exam-
ple), various types of section lines are used. Sec-
tion lines are used on all types of materials,
nonmetallic as well as metallic. See Fig . 9 -6 .
In general use, however, the section lines for
cast iron are applied to working (detail) drawings
of a separate part.
A FULL SECTION is created by passing the cut-
ting plane line through the entire object, as shown
in Fig. 9-7. Lines which were hidden are now ex-
posed and shown as solid object lines.
NOTE: On ly the edges that the cutting plane line
touch are shown. The hidden lines behind the cut-
ting plane line are generally omitted. They would
merely add confusion to the interior detail. See
Fig. 9-7.
First, determine the direction of the cutting plane
line on the corresponding view. Then transfer the
details behind the cutting plane line to the sectioned
view. The transferring of points on the cutting plane
line to the sectional view locates the interior detail.
Note that the outer edges of the part are always
defined by solid object lines; hidden lines would not
be permissible.

-------- -,L_
-+ -
f--
I
I
r--------.J
r---------

SECTION LINES

0
Fig. 9 -4 . Section lines emphasize surfaces that have been cut . Usua lly , they are drawn at a 45 angle .

POOR PRACTICE POOR PRACTICE PREFERRED METHOD

Fig. 9-5. Left and center views illustrate poor practice because section lines are drawn parallel with part object lines. Right view
shows preferred method of section lining.

104
 Sectional Views

STEEL

• CAST IRON RUBBER . PLASTIC .

•
OR ELECTRICAL INSULATION
GENERAL USAGE

WHITE METAL.
ZINC . LEAD .
BABBITT . ALLOYS

BRONZE . BRASS . CORK . FELT

COPPER FABRICS. FIBER .
LEATHER

MAGNESIUM .
ALUMINUM . AND
ALLOYS

Fig . 9 -6. Material symbols for sectioning are pictured and labeled .

CUTTING PLANE LINE

,/
0- -- 0 - - -0 - -- 0- - -0
I I
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ·"
I I

L--h~~-
: I
--+~Hr~
I I
lI __ _ _ _ ___ __ ____ ____ ~I
I I
0- - - - - - -0 - -- 0 - - -0

SECTION LINES

A PULLEY B COVER

Fig . 9 -7 . Examples are shown for full sections of parts : A - Pulley . B- Cover.

105
 Machine Trades Print Reading

With practice, this technique will be most helpful REVOLVED SECTION

in visualizing the other types of sectional views.
HALF SECTIONS
A HALF SECTION of a symmetrical (both halves
the same) object shows the interior and exterior
features in the same view. See Fig. 9 - 8. One half
of the view will show the sectioning of the interior
of the object, while the remaining half will detail the
exterior. Again, section views are drawn with solid
object lines. Hidden lines may tend to add more con-
fusion to the section lines.
The omitted hidden lines are standard practice if
the part is not complicated. However, hidden lines
may be of value when used with forged parts or
complicated cast parts for dimensioning purposes .
The cutting plane line in Fig. 9 - 8 is drawn at a
90 0 angle toward the right side of the top view .
Follow the transfer lines from the top view into the
front view. The right side of the front view has been
sectioned by the use of the cutting plane line and
sectioning lines. The main centerline in the front
view will remain unchanged as the center of the part
in Fig . 9 -8.
The half section can easily be seen in the front
view . As in all half sections, the sectioned portion
will only be one half of that view .
A REVOLVED SECTION is a sectional drawing
that represents a single portion of the workpiece.
Revolved sections are cross sections of the shape
not shown in the conventional views . See Fig . 9 -9 .
A centerline is drawn through the portion which
will be revolved and sectioned. The centerline acts
as an imaginary viewing plane (cutting plane) that
revolves 90 0 to the original view on the centerline.
The section is revolved directly on the surface of
the original view and drawn into true size and shape .
Keep in mind, the drafter or designer must provide
the true size and shape of the contours . The lines
from the view may overlap with the revolved sec-
tion. These should be omitted.
Revolved sections are commonly applied to arms ,
ribs, spokes, bars, and irregular contoured parts.
REMOVED SECTION
A REMOVED SECTION is similar to the revolved
section, but "removed" from its position within a
view to a new location elsewhere on the print. The
relocating of this removed section allows the drafter
to enlarge that particular section for clarity . Also,
by enlarging the removed section, dimensioning
may be added for further clarification.

TOP VIEW

TRANSFER
LINES

THIS HALF
IS NOT
SECTIONED

HIDDEN LINES OMITTED

Fig . 9 -8 . Top view of housing is projected downward to show half section in front view . Isometric view of half section
is pictured at right .

106
 Sectional Views
-------------------
Fig. 9-9. Revolved sections represent a cross section of a portion of workpiece.
To maintain clarity when more than one
removed section is shown, each section should be
marked separately. The removed sections are
marked in alphabetical order, starting with Section
A-A (then Section 8-8 , Section C-C, etc.) with
each of the corresponding letters on the cutting
plane line ends. See Fig. 9-10. The use of a cutting
plane line marked with letters at both ends is the
main difference between a removed section and a
revolved section.
BROKEN-OUT SECTION (PARTIAL)
The BROKEN-OUT SECTION is a special type of
a sectioning application, Fig. 9-11. Often, a small,
single-detail portion of the part's interior needs more
clarification. The broken-out section enables the
print reader to concentrate directly on that detailed
portion of the part. By concentrating only on that
portion, the detail would be more visible to the print
reader. Otherwise, the detail may be lost if a full
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ J
~~
/"-r-.,............. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
section or half section were applied.
A broken-out section can be located on a print
by the use of a wavy line called a BREAK LINE. See
views A and B in Fig. 9-11.
In this case, the break line acts as an imaginary
cutting plane line. The large and heavy cutting plane
line with arrows would not be placed on the draw-
ing. The area within the break line to the part outline
is section lined according to material type . Note
steel section lining in view A, Fig. 9-11, and cast
iron section lining in view B.
DIRECTIONS FOR SECTION PROBLEMS
The following problems will require you to sketch
finished examples of the various section types.
Problems include Full, Half, Revolved, Removed,
and Broken-out sections, Figs. 9-12 to 9-18.
Each problem will have specific directions to
follow. Use a straightedge or rule to complete the
sketches.
107
 Machine Trades Print Reading

SECTION A-A SECTION 8-8

f' B

A
Fig . 9-10. Removed sections A-A and B-B are sectional views relocated on print away from workpiece .

A.

I
I
I I
--L_.-J--

B.
Fig . 9-11. Broken-out sections are sectioned areas of parts ' interiors outlined by wavy break lines .

108
 Sectional Views

,----------
I
I
I
-....J
I

'""-----.--.- ---
c
o
';:;
u
Q)
(/)

co
(/)
co

....c

-o....

..
~

f-----l-LJ--
I I ---~ ~
E
.c
o

II :I 0::
Cl
,~
C
o
';:;
u
I I en
Q)

I I N
I I ~
,
I I « 0)
Cl
I I I u:
I I «
I I z
I I o
I I t>w
I
(
I I
I
C/)

. . -- ----,- t -,-----'
I
I I

109
Machine Trades Print Reading

'r--
)--

c
0
0;:;
u
Q)
rJl

'r-- .....:::J
rn
tJJ
)-- rn
3:
o~
>
Q)
"0

....If
.....
~

....
Q)

Q)
c.
E
0
U
N
E
Q)
.n
0
n:
en
c
c
0
0;:;
u
Q)
C/J

<Vi
,
en
en
u::

110
 Sectional Views

/
/ /'
./

/"'"
--- --- .............

......... ........ ""-

/ I
//
" " \ "\
I I \ \
I / \ \
\ \
__.--+--+-++-1--[ _ -+-+-----.
\ \
\ \
\ \
\ "" / /
'\.
,,'.........
........ -- -
L.,.../
. . . --.J.--_/
/ /

,/
/

Fig. 9-14. Sectioning Problem 3: Complete this view as a half section.

111
 Machine Trades Print Reading

I / '-r-
( III I
I I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
/
r----.-t-
I I I I
I I I
! I I

Fig. 9 - 15 . Sectioning Problem 4 : Make a half section of front view .

112
 Sectional Views

Fig. 9-16. Sectioning Problem 5: Draw revolved section on centerlines provided.

113
 Machine Trades Print Reading

B_--.

A-A
8-8
Fig. 9 - 17. Sectioning Problem 6 : Draw removed sections on centerlines provided. Use rounded edges where necessary .

'14
 Sectional Views

c
o
'';::;
u
(!)
(J)

.....
:::l
o
C
OJ
.::t.
e

+
.0
(1J

(J)
(1J

(!)
.....
(!)
Cl.
E
o
u

E
Cll
:0
o
a:
OJ
I
H I
c
C
o
, tTl:! r:-tT-iI
I I I
'';::;
u
(!)
Cf)
II II
II II I I I I ro
J II II I I I I
LLIJj L1 I
-l-L
j
I
O'l

OJ
u:::
/: I
I

115
 NOTE: ! ALL DIAMETERS CONCENTRIC TO ¢ A'
WITHIN . 0005
2. ±.005 ON FRACTIONAL DIMENSIONS
3. BRE.AK SI-IARP EDGES EXCEPT AS NOTED
4. REMOVE ALL BUR.I2S
.3 5. DELIVER WITH RUSTPROOFING LPS #~
32 012 EQUI\I.

POLISHffi

G 1
01

~! (:; ~
cnlN ~~
~~ ~rfi s:
III
<'J1C'.i IS< (')
ffiPOLISH ~
Q :i"
N ~

tOl
(l'\(}\
C\lC\.I ...
-I
III
..... "'\f'<;f a.
~
..... &. rJ)
CJ)
...5'"C
....
::JJ
R.OIO
:*1'7'200 DQILL ~ DEEP ~
III
a.
E ~ -20 UNC, ~ DEEP - 2 HOLES ::J
co

DATE N{I. REQ'D.

&. 6-4 TWO TOLEDO SCALE
_ _ "-NOT
~c.".LJANCE.U"CftIWC _ _.. ~
/ ' " MFG'S OF

O~~·
DI ...

& "ACHIME USED ON.

FIWIQYlLU, w.coMIN 13128 EQUIPMENT
A REII'll': TO AUY.
TITLE

~ A7994B400A CAP-EYE END

&
1 I.. I I O'MONSIONS
J-~~~+·------;:::-::-:~:-:-:-i·-::;=-t-=--:--1
A ± '1.:::O::LO::::;:s~:::~:::::'ONS
ON ALL .... ACTIONAL MACHIN~D
MATU'AL 101 e C.I2.S.
l
±
A ADDED PoLlSH,eg 8-1
----+-::-:-t-:-.
.010

::::-1 ± .002 ON ALL DECIMAL'

DECIMAL DIMENSIONS
NO. CHANGE BY I DATE :t 1/1 DIIGIltIlIl: ON ANGULAR DIMENSIONS
RAe''' • • LU~INT , ....

Fig. 9-19. Cap-Eye End.

 Sectional Views

DIRECTIONS - QUIZ QUESTIONS

1. The industrial prints in this section will test your print reading ability.
2. Study the views, dimensions, title block, and notes in Figs. 9-19 through 9-24.
3. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

CAP-EYE END QUIZ

1. What kind of sectional view is shown? 1.

2. How many surfaces are polished? 2.
3. How long is the 3.927 diameter? 3.
4. What size tap drill is used? 4.
5. How deep should the holes be tapped? 5.
6. What assembly print is this part used on? 6.
7. What kind of material is used for the part? 7.
8. What does note 4 state? 8.
9. What specification is given for the rear outer edge of 9.
the part?
10. What size is the bore on the part? 10.
11. What is the low limit on the large outside diameter 11 .
of the part?
12. Which diameters must be concentric to diameter "A"? 12.
13. What size chamfer is called for on the part? 13.
14. What is dimension 0 ? 14.
15. What surface or line in the side view is the same 15.
as a in the front view?
16. Line ~ in the side view is what surface in the 16.
front view?
17. How many parts are required? 17.
18. Line 0 in the side view is what line in the front 18.
view?
19. Is surface 0 shown in the front view? 19.
20. What tolerance is used on fractional dimensions? 20.

117
 1--- - - - .3 - - - -----i

~x45°CHAM IS
2 - PLACES / Rli (TYP)

A POLlS~ SI--'IOOTI-I -1-1- I I ---+

) ~I\()
I I ,, !, ,;
-- ~
,
~.,
1
~~ ~II)~
~\f)
1 0') '-~I~
~ I~ ~~ -
,,-...;: ~
t.\I l~
~~

""
~IO ~~ ~Ist
(}o.~ \\Jt\j
,, ~
~\Q
~ tlJl\j
,,~

, ~ i I ~j
~<\i ~ j" S
~ ~ III
(")

<El ~ :;,-
::J
~ CD
-I
~

........ 31..r 45°OIAM. III

0-
CD
Vl
(X)
."
-[Q] ..I 5 ~

64 ...
:;'
:c
NOTE: ALL DIAMETERS TO 8£ [g .070 CD
III
CONCENTPIC TO 0 :l\" WlTI-/IN .0005 .074 0-
/ :;'
i:..OO5 ON ALL FRACTIONAL DIMENSIONS /.32. CO
BREAK SHARP EDGES
DATE "(I. IUO' D.
& TOLEDO SCALE
_,--c-r-.-.,ye / ' MFG " OF

I '7" I K " " .. H

1-10
tACHIH( U'(D DH .
f

TITLE
_w._mH--...-
or_ OI'''.&:JANC.
O~~ ·
EQUIPMENT

IIf'11 TO ASST .
A 79948100A PISTON
UNLe •• OTH."W' •• SNC'I"'CO D..... IY SCALf ,M"TIIIAL I
"''''''-¥-,='-'~~~~--+'''''''''f-':''':'-,---1 ± I' . . ON ALL ,.!ltAeTloNA" DIM.NS'ONS i-IA6 FULL /0/8 CI(JS I
::t ;:~:':'::'~."'''''CT IO"AL CHICIID NO
MACHINeD
BB o • • WtfItC

t-==.p:i:CIt...:iIO:.~.:iC!..L..._ _.p~+.:.::!._~ ! 't~:ao:::~~ ::~::~.."~:~~:I::'~O". A" On'.#' A 799050000A

.... CJ ... aU . . . INT , . . . .

Fig . 9 -20 . Piston .

 Sectional Views

PISTON QUIZ

1. How wide is the internal groove in the workpiece? 1.

2. List all the outside diameters. 2.
3. What diameter is the internal groove? 3.
4. How long is the 1.358/1.353 diameter? 4.
5. How far is the 7/32 wide groove from the left end 5.
of the workpiece?
6. How long is the .875 hole (include chamfers)? 6.
7. Determine dimension 0 7.
8. What is the mean dimension on the counterbore 8.
diameter?
9. What are the specifications for chamfers? 9.
10. How many pieces are required? 10.
11. How far is the internal groove located from the right 1 1.
end of the workpiece?
12. How many chamfers are required on the workpiece? 1 2.
13. Determine dimension 0 13.
14. What tolerance is required on fractional dimensions? 14.
1 5. How deep is the counterbore? 1 5.
16. What was revision & ? 16.
17. Determine dimension 0 1 7.
18. What is the radius for rounds? 18.
19. What maximum wall thickness could there be be- 19.
tween the 7/32 wide groove and the .875 diameter?

20. Determine distance ~. 20.

119
 I" 7/8 .. I

<E]~
-&
~ ~1/21
.170
.165
all[)
I 1/32 X 45 0
MM
O"CO
.-. .-.

-s.
#7<'20D
DRILL
CHAM.
I

MIM~
~--­
I
0"00
O"0o::l
'<t I[) - ~
, 'u III
s n
:::r
:::J
~

...-f
III
.... '-------"-- BREAK SHARP c..
~
N CORNERS III
o 05/8
..."'tI
...:r
jJ
~
III
c..
:::J
to

TDL. UNLESS SPECIFIEDIPARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP EDGES. BURRS. FLASH
NOTE: DECIMALS ± .005 AND CLEAN. PART NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED WITH 1/16 TO
FRACTIONS ± 1/64 1/8 HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS, BARS, PLATES, ETC.
MATERIAL PARTS MAY BE SAW CUT AND SANDED UNLESS OTHERWISE
ANGLES ± 1/2+ SPECIFIED
2011- T3 ALUM.
TITLE ASSEMBL Y DWG. NO.

D 1\.1 AS RS 2/2 HUB ROLLER BRG,

i--
DR. SCALE
C I\.IAS GK 1130
RS 2X
B 1\.1 AS RS 1115

A I\.IAS RS 1115 G 8x B DESIGNS A-900

No. 'WAS DATE AP'V'D FRANKLIN, WISCONSIN

Fig. 9-21. Hub Roller Bearing.

 Sectional Views

HUB ROLLER BEARING QUIZ

1. How many corners are broken? 1.

2. How deep is the counterbore? 2.
3. What was revision B? 3.
4. What scale is the print? 4.
5. What does the scale used on this print actually mean? 5.
6; What tolerance is used on unspecified decimal 6.
dimensions?
7. What size is the drilled hole? 7.
8. What kind of sectional view is shown? 8.
9. How long is the 5/8 diameter? 9.
0
10. How wide is the 45 chamfer? 10.
11. What size radii are specified on the print? 11.
12. What type of material is 2011-T3? 12.
13. What is the print number? 13.
14. What is the minimum overall length allowed on the 14.
part?
15. What was revision D? 15.
16. How much tolerance is given on the small outside 16.
diameter?
17. What is the high limit on the counterbore diameter? 17.
18. What do the hidden lines in the right-side view 18.
represent?
1 9. What shape is the part? 1 9.
20. What chamfer is called for on the print? 20.

121
 COATING ~ RUST BAN DIP
1- 3 . 504 .002------~-~1
+.003

:438 I'" I· 1.{o25 • I· IAI .. I

.....--A
~
11 .//9 ±..004

o
to
ro -~-
"-tIooo.-A 10
.375 D121LL rq s:
r:u
o
=r
2-HOLE.S ;5'
CD

...-I
....
N
NOTE: PAJ2T MUST BE FLAT r:u
Q,
CD
en
N
WITJ.·HN .010
..."tI
MATE.R IAL: F X- 200S-T
COPPER INFILTJ2ATED
-
;5'

::c
CD
r:u
POWERED H20N Q,
;5'
(Q

TOL. UNLESS SPECIFIED PARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP EDGES. BURRS. FLASH

.A-A DECIMALS ± .005

FRACTIONS ± 1/64
AND CLEAN. PART NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED WITH 1/16 TO
lIB HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS. BARS. PlATES. ETC.
PARTS MAY BE SAW CUT AND SANDED UN1.ESS OTHERWISE
SCALE: 4/1 = \" ANGLES ~. SPECIFIED.

TITLE I ASSEMBLY DWG. NO.

• ,GUARD r2ETAININ5 PLATE

D
SCALE
C
FULL
B

A
No. 1
IREDf:2AWN
WAS
'-7
DATE FRANKLIN, WISCONSIN
A-550
Fig . 9 -22 . Guard Retaining Plate .
 Sectional Views

GUARD RETAINING PLATE QUIZ

1. What is the maximum length of the part? 1.

2. What is the distance between the two countersunk 2.

holes?
3. How thick is the part? 3.

4. How deep are the countersunk holes? 4.

5. What is the drawing number? 5.

6. What scale is the print? 6.

7. What is the high limit on the countersink angles? 7.

II 8. How wide is the part? 8.

9. Calculate dimension 0 9.
10.
10. Are any unilateral decimal tolerances shown?
1 1 . What kind of sectional view is shown? 11.

12. Why is the sectional view so large in comparison to 12.

the other views?
13. What kind of material is used for the part? 13.

14. What surface treatment is required? 14.

15. What is the maximum distance allowed between the 15.

two countersunk holes?
16. Were any revisions made to the drawing? 16.

17. What size are the two drilled holes? 17.

18. If the part is made to a thickness of .116, is the part 18.

over, under, or within allowable tolerance?
19. What size is the large diameter of the countersink? 19.

20. How flat must the part be? 20.

123
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD WISCUNSIN 53005

I .3755
.3745/zEAr1

.3
R/6 R~ .0/0 x45°C,L/AH.
.020 /-ZOUNC-2B

~I<Q

t------
i
R~
4
In ......I"'t- ._---
A
8
l~- J I~
C\!
~ I
.=®
~ ~ @I
~I~ \11~
./80

~~
./76 !fl ~ s
~, -
~I~ ,-:l\J
~ ~I~
~~
III
n
"I\)
~~
~
.050 Ci.j
~" ~"
./40
./.30
",\:)
~~
j '\:
'\:
~
S"
CD

...-i
L ~
.30" III
~ 0-
CD
N In
.j:>
...""C

--...J .060
.086
5,]t
..3Z
~
...
S"
~
CD
III
9:
::J
.4// co
.406
.6..30
.620

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

FINISH SPECIFICATIONS
MACHINED SURFACES 12~AX
GROUND SURFACES 3VMAX
D
DECIMAl. TOL. )()(' 010 XX",; ,m NAM' WOBBLE PLATE '2Y c !APPEIJ /.3/9//..3/0 :5
B IAIJL)£P .050
I'",AC:TIDNTOL' 010
{"<e>
ANGLE TOL • ,~

REMOVE BURRS AND SHARP EDGES TO 'EL£AS£O '<'0

DO NOT SCALE

Fig. 9-23. Wobble Plate.

•
 Sectional Views

WOBBLE PLATE QUIZ

1 . How deep is the 1.2615/1.2610 reamed hole? 1.

2. List the diameters of all grooves. 2.

3. How long is the 1.075/1.070 diameter bore? 3.

4. Determine distance 0 4.
5.
5. What kind of material is used for the part?
6. What kind of sectional views are used on this print? 6.

7. Which decimal diameter on the print allows the most 7.

tolerance?
8. How many reamed holes are asked for on the print? 8.

9. What is the thread size of the tapped hole? 9.

10. What is the maximum allowable size (high limit) for 10.
the 1.005 dimension?
11 . List the fillets shown on the print. 1 1.

12. Determine dimension ~ 12.

13. How wide is the 30 angle (chamfer)?

0 13.

14. How long is the 1.2593/1.2588 diameter bore? 14.

15. What scale is the print? 15.

16. What class fit is the tapped hole? 16.

17. Determine dimension
0 17.
18.
18. How much wall thickness is there between the out-
side diameter of the part and the diameter of the
narrow groove?
19. Determine distance
~ 19.
20. What finish is required on the machined surfaces? 20.

125
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKfiELD WISCONSIN 53005

¢~

[f]

16~±;\- ! J NOTE'
FORM FILLETS AS NEEDED

s:
III
I
n
::::r
[2 S·
CD

...-i
III
C\I
..... Co
CD
N C/)

6h~--J~
en "tJ
~.

Rj6
I
...
::::I

:c
CD
III
• mlOJ 4 Co
:r
C!~
<C

SECTION A-A
SCALE: I~I
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
fiNISH SPECIFICATIONS
MACHINED SURFACES 12S/MAX
GROUND SURFACES 30AX
DECIMAL TOL XX.!: 010 XXX:
.!: OOO~

,,"RACTION TOL + 010

ANGLE TOL ~ ,"
REMOVE aURRS AND SHARP EO{;ES TO

DO NOT SCALE PART NUMElER 30-44- 0140

~XWN I.J·F.B.
ICH'~V"D JR.S
IAt l<ELEASED 117

B'P INC

Fig. 9-24. Drill Stand Handle.

 Sectional Views

DRILL STAND HANDLE QUIZ

1 . What is the maximum overall length of the workpiece? 1.

2. How wide is the slot on the fork end of the handle? 2.

3. What kind of sectional views are shown on this print? 3.

4. What is dimension
0
5. What scale is the print?
? 4.
5.

6. How deep is the slot? 6.

7. What is dimension [I] ? 7.

8. How long or wide is the 3/4 diameter shown in the 8.

top view?
9. What type of material is used to make the drill stand 9.
handle?
10. What is dimension [£] ? 10.

1 1 . How long is the short angular bend on the handle? 1 1.

12. What is dimension 0 ?

13. What is the radius at the end of the handle?

12.
13.

14. Is Section A-A the same scale as the print? 14.

15. What is dimension

0 ?
16. What is the total drop on the handle from the main
15.
16.
centerline?

~
17. What is dimension ? 17.

18. What is dimension ? 18.

19. What is dimension ? 19.

20. What tolerance is used on fractional dimensions? 20.

127
 Unit " c

10 f" ... +-1I....p.

t\ .
I
"t
• Ii
.
• ...... <,- .~:: ,"';,.::"....... - .~
~

After studying this unit, you will be able to:

o Demonstrate the ability to distinguish different
types of angles.
o Identify a chamfer and interpret its size.
o Define the term "taper" and interpret the
meaning of TPF and TPI.
o Perform calculations using taper data.
o Recognize a bevel and determine its
measurement.

An ANGLE is the amount of rotation or turn

measured in degrees (0) between two lines that
converge or meet at a point called the "vertex."
The division of a circle into 360° defines the Fig. 10-1 . Two methods for dimensioning internal chamfers.
measurement of an angle.
Applied to machining, an angle is the measure-
ment between planes (surfaces) or locations (such
as holes located on a circle) measured in degrees. or two linear dimensions. Any chamfer angle less
Refer to Unit 4 for additional information on angles. than 45° should have a linear dimension included
The types of angles applied to parts and their on the drawing. See Fig. 10-2.
features are chamfers, bevels, and tapers. A leader and note dimension chamfers on 45°
perpendicular surfaces. See Fig. 10-3. Sometimes
CHAMFERS "chamfer" is included in a note although it does not
follow the current ASME standard.
A CHAMFER is a beveled edge or angle applied
to a hole, shaft, or an edge to remove sharp edges.
Chamfers are defined by a linear dimension and an
angle or by two linear dimensions. Chamfering aids
in the assembly of parts. There are two types of
chamfers-interior or exterior.
LINEAR DIMENSION l
Interior chamfers are angles applied to edges of
interior features such as holes. A chamfer on a hole
is dimensioned by stating its diameter and angle.
Fig. 10-1 shows two methods for dimensioning
internal chamfers of a hole.
-Ji·
I------...: ~o.
125

Exterior chamfers are angles applied to exterior

features such as edges. Chamfers are common on
the ends of threaded fasteners. The chamfer aids in
starting the fastener in the threaded hole, as well as
protecting the start of the thread.
An external chamfer such as a chamfer on a
ANGULAR DIMENSION

Fig.10-2. The chamfer on the shaft dimensioned by its length

J
shaft is dimensioned by stating its length and angle and angle.

128
 Angles

THIS
.125 X 45" TAPERS
or TAPER is a conical surface on a shaft or in a hole
.125 X .125 where the surface's diameter uniformly changes in
size along its length. See Fig. 10-5. A taper uniformly
changes in size along its length. Taper is the difference
in diameters per unit of length, usually per in. or per ft.
MEANS THI S
The formula to calculate taper is: (D - d) I L.

.125 --j U .125

Standard machine tapers are used on cutting
tools, tool holders, and machine tool spindles.
Standard machine tapers include the following :
• Morse-5/S" taper per ft. , Jacobs-.5915" to
~ .7619" taper per ft.

/:5" • Brown and Sharpe-1/2" taper per ft.

} per ft.
Fig. 10-3 . Two ways of dimensioning a 45° exterior chamfer.
When two perpendicular surfaces intersect and
their linear values for the chamfer are different from
each other, then both values appear on the drawing.
See Fig. 10-4, A. The same dimensioning applies to
two non-perpendicular surfaces with a chamfer, as
shown in Fig. 10-4, B.
• Jarno-.600" taper per ft.
• American National Standard-3 1/2" taper
Tapers are dimensioned in several ways :
• By indicating diameter of both ends,
including taper length . Refer to Fig. 10-5.
• By stating large diameter, taper length , and
including a note for standard tapers such as
NO.5 Morse taper. See Fig. 10-6.
• By giving diameter at large end, length of taper,
and included angle, as shown in Fig. 10-7.
• By specifying TPI (taper per in .) or TPF
(taper per ft.), taper length , and large
diameter. See Fig. 10-S.
• By specifying the taper on diameter per unit
of length after the taper symbol , as shown in
Fig. 10-9.

t
I- L=-1 ~
0D 0d
! A

!0D _i
0d
L t
B I- L
B
-I
Fig. 10-4. External chamfers on different surfaces.
A-D imensioning a chamfer with different measurements Fig . 10-5 . Tapers are dimensioned by providing large
on perpend icular surfaces. B-Dimensioning a chamfer diameter, small diameter, and length of taper. A-Exterior
on surfaces that are not perpendicular. taper. B-Interior taper.

129
 Machine Trades Print Reading

r
NO. 5 MORSE TAPER SYMBOL ~ AMOUNT OF SLOPE
PER 1 INCH
TAPER

T
01.750
c> .22: 1

f
L lz=dz:=z::::z::z:::z::z:~ 01.75 -+--1

I - -4.000----1
~ t
Fig. 10-6. The note "No.5 Morse Taper" represents a standard
machine taper of 5/8" taper per foot (TPF).

Fig. 10-9. Specifying a taper by the amount of slope per unit of

I.. 3.875----l length measured from the large diameter.

f ~
01.j88 ~
B. Change TPF to TPI.

1. Divide TPF by 12.

--'--- t Example: Change 2.4 TPF to TPI

Fig. 10-7. Tapers can also be dimensioned by giving large 2.4 + 12 = .2" TPI
diameter, length of taper, and included angle. C. Calculate small diameter (0d) , given TPI, taper
length, and large diameter. See Fig. 10-10.

. 1875 TPI 1. Multiply TPI by taper length (in inches) .

.0625 x 4.625 = .28906"

I --+- 01.875
2. Subtract product from large diameter.
1.875 - .28906 = 1.58594" small diameter
D. Calculate small diameter, given taper per ft.

~2.650-~.1~
(TPF), taper length, and large diameter.
See Fig. 10-11.

1. Divide TPF by 12 to obtain TPI.

.600..;- 12 = .05" TPI
Fig. 10-8. Specifying large diameter, length of taper, and taper 2. Multiply TPI by taper length.
per inch (TPI) or taper per foot (TPF) is another acceptable
way of dimensioning taper.
.05 x 5.44 = .272"
3. Subtract product from large diameter.
1.125 - .272 = .853" small diameter
TAPER CALCULATIONS
E. Calculate TPI, given large diameter, small
diameter, and taper length. See Fig. 10-12.
A. Change TPI (taper per in.) to TPF
(taper per ft.).
1. Subtract small diameter from large diameter.
1. Multiply TPI by 12. 1.50 - .875 = .625"
Example: Change .125 TPI to TPF 2. Divide difference by taper length .
.125 x 12 = 1.S// TPF .625..;- 4.08 = .153" TPI
130
 Angles

BEVEL
/.0625 TPI

t -, BEVEL

1.875 0d
L ~
I" 4.625 .. I

Fig. 10-10. Taper Calculation C: Find small diameter. FRONT RIGHT SIDE
VIEW VIEW
Fig. 10-13. Two view drawing indicating bevels .
. 600 TPF~
~ ....----~~~~
OdI 1 1 .1 25

.. -5.440-~.. lt
T II-- -1 .750

Fig. 10-11 . Taper Calculation D: Find small diameter from taper

per foot (TPF) .

. XXX TPI
---.-,- r -----L-_ _ ~
Fig. 10-14. Coordinate method of dimensioning angles.
1.500-+--- ---1-.875
, I
I"
'--- 4.080-----l
The angular method, Fig. 10-15, uses one linear
Fig. 10-12. Taper Calculation E: Find taper per inch (TPI). dimension and one angle dimension in degrees to
define an angle.

BEVEL

A BEVEL is the angle one surface makes with

another surface when they are not at right angles.
It is the slant or inclination of a surface, Fig. 10-13.
Bevel is used to denote an angle machined on a
workpiece that is not cylindrical. An angle applied
160" 45" ,
to a cylindrical piece or hole is referred to as a
CHAMFER. Sometimes, however, the terms bevel
and chamfer are used interchangeably.
1
1 .1 25
I 1 .340
ANGULAR DIMENSIONING L L-----_------l ~
Two methods are used to dimension angles: the ~I- 2 . 5 0 0 - - - .-.
.. 1

coordinate method and the angular method.

The coordinate method, Fig. 10-14, uses two Fig. 10-15. Angular method of dimensioning angles.
linear dimensions to define an angle. The coordinate
method is used when a high degree of accuracy is
desired.
131
 REN NO C""NGIt'S MA., .1Ii. MA Oi[ ON " .. ,.ItTV IYC.MS WIl""c... u ...... ........... ,. _ . . . . _ . ... _ .... ,, __ . ... .. _ ••

...-18' DIA.- WHEN ASSEMBLED IN SYM . SYM . E . C . R . NO. bATE REVISION RECORD DR . CK . SPC
, -. 0

A "C "DIA. HOLE

A
8
14-0442
40-
ADDED 4006~'
ANGLE "r" WAS 1&°
~o
At.
C ~-. WAS .W.IO ~
110"
l "Ej--i BOTH ENDS
I""
'V~ / ff ffA-.,_~
-"'-
......" ~

~
-f-- - - IJ + 1\ \
1/ /
\ \~
~I-
I~
:-r:
~
II)
(')
'-.... :T
;j
Connectors, Inc.
HAND PUSH FIT IN
- l...- THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION METRIC
(1)

:;t
...
eN
: ( DIA. "Go" -"NO-GO' RING
f-
@CJ
DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLI METERS
II)
a.
(1)
I\) - NO MIOA EL OIBUJO I NE PAS RELEVER DE COTE
(II

."
SPLlT- TIGHT SEAM ON I.D. I
-
DO NOT SCALE KEINEN MASS STAB NEHMEN ::::!.
ENDS MUST BE PARALLEL TOlERANCE UNLESS OTHERW ISE SPECIFI ED LAYOUT ANOQR PlATE NUMBE R
;j
IO V" PERMISSIBLE ON O.D.
AND SQUARE WITH AXIS ±.OJO SUPf~oes
::0
WITHIN .015 ± z.°ANGLES
PREV MODEL REF OWO SCALE FIRST USEO ON REOD
(1)
II)
a.
NONE. ;j
.7291 .060 .04 14°@
.726 .74
e S APPROVAl..
I
4006953 .7271 WALL .76 .08 20° 1
RESP ENGINEER

DESIGN APPFK)VAl CHIEF DRAFTSMAN

MASTER PAOJECT

MASTER TEMPLATE TO BE FLIRN

IPAOJECT

..,PPRVD
(Q

.501 .390 .510 .04 14°

4005851 .499 .370 .500 .490 .08 20°
4 ST'tl lNG APPROVAL STANDARDS APPROVAL ote MODEL REOUIRED

OAAWNBY
dp'E08Y W<IGHT
.311 .20 .70 .04 14°@ GLk:. EST ACTUAl

® 4005307 .310 .68 2 FINISH 1APPAvO

.309 .18 .08 20°
.628 .530 .510 .04 14° MATE"'l S.A.E.. 1010 STEEL
4005149 .624 .510 .625 .490 .08 20°
4 APPlICABlE A M SPECS TO BE FUANIStiEO
I. . T."'Al COOE CJ
.5625 .452 .820 .04 14° .....
4005148 .5610 .447
.562 .800 .08@: 20° 2 CHART-DOWEL- SPLIT TYPE
PART NO. A B C 0 E F REQ.'O ~~:"D:TEi ~~ 1"'"4 005 14(0
Fig. 10-16. Chart-Dowel-Split Type.
 Angles

CHART-DOWEL-SPLIT TYPE

Refer to Fig. 10-16. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. Which part has the longest length? 1.

2. Which part has the smallest tolerance for the outside 2.

diameter?
3. What diameter will "8" become when assembled in a 3.
.500 diameter hole?
4. Which part numbers require 4 parts? 4.

5. What was revision C? 5.

6. What material is used for the split dowels? 6.

7. What tolerance is used on angular dimensions? 7.

8. What is the high limit for "F" on Part No. 4005148? 8.

9. If Part No. 4006953 has an outside diameter of .7291, 9.

what size will diameter "8" become when assembled in
a .726 diameter hole? (Double the wall thickness for the
calculations.)
10. How is diameter A checked? 10.

11. What scale is the print? 11.

12. What does E.C.A. mean? 12.

13. What is the maximum tolerance for diameter A among 13.

the various parts?
14. Why is one-half of the front view sectioned? 14.

15. What size is the drawing? 15.

16. How square must the ends of the dowel be with the axis? 16.

17. If the chamfer lengths of Part No. 4006953 are at the 17.
high limit, and the total length of the dowel at low limit,
how long will the bearing surface of the dowel be?

18. If the chamfer lengths of Part No. 4005851 are at the low 18.
limit, and the total length of the dowel at low limit, how
long will the bearing surface of the dowel be?
19. What is the maximum allowable length for Part No. 19.
4005149?
20. Which part number was added last to the print? 20.

133
 REVISIONS
APPROVED
REV DESCRIPTION DATE

A
B
C

IV
~ R.416
/ . 0 5 6 TPI
.i
R053

j
I

f
0..365
375 -
---+------- 'j(t:-\-
~ ® ~
Ql
n

~
:::r
L t
\ 1~0m ~
::J
15• CD

I-- .120 ::;t

Ql
...
Co)
.060 _
.052 1.090±.015
Q.
CD
1/1
-1:>0
"tJ

-
~.
::J

:0
CD
Ql
Q.
::J
(Q

DRAWN BY: DATE COMPANY

INTERPRET DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009. MB 10/22 G & B DESIGNS
CHECKED BY : DATE :
PARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES R.G. 11/2 FRANKLIN , WISCONSIN
EDGES, BURRS, FLASH AND CLEAN. PART
APPROVED BY: DATE :
NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED WITH 1116 TO .XX= ±.010 .XXX = ±.005 TITLE :
1/8 HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS,
BARS, PLATES , ETC. PARTS MAY BE SAW
FRACTION S = ±.015 ANGLES = ±.5°
MATERIAL NO' 1018 TAPERED RIVET
CUT AND SANDED UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED.
THI RD ANG LE PROJECTION MATERIAL DESCRIPTION. SAE I CAGE CODE
I DRAWING NO A-8720 TREV

~
STEEL
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SCALE:
3: 1 I WEIGHT I SHEET.
1 of 1
Fig. 10-17. Tapered Rivet.
 Angles

TAPERED RIVET

Refer to Fig. 10-17. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What is the maximum overall length of the rivet? 1.

2. What is the diameter of the rivet's head? 2.

3. List the lower limit dimensions found on the print. 3.

4. What tolerance is specified for three-place decimal 4.

dimensions?
5. What is the approximate small diameter of the end of the 5.
rivet at A?
6. What radius is the head of the rivet? 6.

7. How much tolerance is allowed for the large diameter on 7.

the tapered rivet?
8. What is the scale of the print? 8.

9. What kind of decimal tolerance is found on the 1.09 9.

dimension?
10. How long is the 15° taper? 10.

11. What finish is required on the tapered rivet? 11.

12. What taper per inch is specified? 12.

13. What kind of material is used to make the part? 13.

14. What is the high limit on the 15° taper? 14.

15. How long is the rivet head? 15.

135
 REVISIONS
REV DESCRiPTION ECO# DATE APPROVED

A
B
C
D
E

0.5156
031 2 X 45° 1.1 25 0.4843 17.625
R .125 X 45° REAM 1.5 TPF
608 TPF, 510
. 0: 508 I ~..... CHECK TAPER
WITH GUAGE s:
L__ Q)
(')
:T
::l

0::t~~-
C1)

.....
- -: 1.375 -I--t--
~
Q)
Q.

4g~3J_1125_11
C1)
CN til
0'1
"'C

.0625 .641 -
:::!.
::l
X -I 1_ I 0. 566 :C1):c
.562 Q)

1--
Q.
CHECK OIA. ::l
1 . 250 --- AT FACE WITH
(Q

I.. 2.625 .. I GO & NO-GO

GUAGE.

INTERPRET DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14.S - 2009.

DRAWN BY
JSH ,DATE 10-17 ,COMPANY MILWAUKEE
CHECKED BY JFB DATE: ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
10-20 BROOKFIELD, WISCONSIN 53005
.X = ±.1 0 .XXX = ±.OOS APPROVED BY' IDATE TITLE
.XX = ± .010 .XXXX = ±.OOOS REMOVE ALL BURRS AND
TOOTH ANCHOR CHUCK
BREAK SHARP CORNERS TO .015 MAX. MATERIAL NO.
FRACTIONS = ±.01O ANGLES = ±1° 08-62-2245
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION IMATERIAL DESCRIPTION. SIZE DRAWING NO REV
MACHINED SURFACES 12gMAX
A 42-66-0360
GROUND SURFACES 3VMAX $E3- 86L20 STEEL SCALE SHEET" 4

Fig. 10-18. Tooth Anchor Chuck.

 Angles

TOOTH ANCHOR CHUCK

Refer to Fig. 10-18. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. List the chamfers found on the print. 1.

2. What is the large diameter of the internal taper? 2. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3. What size is the large end of the tapered shank? 3. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4. What is the taper per inch of the chuck shank? 4. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5. What is the low limit for the total length of the workpiece? 5.
6. How far is the .5157 hole from the right end of the 6.
workpiece?
7. What size is the small end of the tapered shank? 7. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8. How deep must you drill the .4843 hole? 8. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9. How is the inside diameter at the face of the chuck 9. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
checked?
10. What kind of material is used for the part? 10. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
11. What is the total length of the shank? 11. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12. What tolerance is applied to the 1.125 dimension? 12. - - - - - - - - - - - - _
13. What is the high limit for the .5156 hole? 13. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
14. What is the taper per inch of the internal hole? 14.
15. What scale is the print? 15. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
16. What size chamfer is put on the .5156 diameter hole? 16.
17. What size radius is found on the print? 17.
18. What is the material number of the part? 18.
19. Who checked the print? 19. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20. What is the low limit dimension of the chuck body 20. - - - - - - - - - - - - -
diameter?

137
 REVISIONS
REV DESC RIPTION ECO# DATE APPROVED

A
B
C
0
E

-+ .
j _ ®~--7S0 ~i 270 I--
1280

~
r j
~
------ 330
.263 0..327
0.250 3:
01
(')

B ~

f I f ::l
CD

'-.0 16 X 45· ~
01
..... a.
.031 X 45· CD
0. 2 18 _ 0· 23~-
Co) (II
00
BOTH END S .2 14 .228
I--
- R .015 "tJ

-
~.
::l

JJ
CD

/~'T
01

I a.
::l

~:::Jl/
(Q

TYPICAL UND ERCU T 4S'

DETAIL: 2 PLACES I-- .062
INTERPRET DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14 .S - 2009.
DRAWN BY:
PAB DATE: 7-07 COMPANY:
MILWAUKEE
CHECKED BY:
DATE: 7-24 ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
SK BROOKFIELD, WISCONSIN 53005
APPROVED BY: DATE:
.x = ±.10 .XXX = ± .OOS REMOVE ALL BURRS AND
TITLE:

.XX = ± .010 .XXXX= ± .OOOS BREAK SHARP CORNERS TO .015 MAX. MATERIAL NO: INTER. PINION BLANK
FRACTIONS = ±.O10
MACHINED SURFACES 12i jMAX
ANGLES = ± 1·
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
08 62 0635
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
E
SA r AGE CODE
J RAWINGNO.: 33-66-4289 I REV

GROUND SURFACES 3V MAX

- --- -- --- -
$A 0~ 41 L40 STEEL SCALE:
2: 1 I WEIGHT: 1
I SHEET:

Fig. 10-19. Inter. Pinion Blank.

 Angles

INTER. PINION BLANK

Refer to Fig. 10-19. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. How long is the .330 diameter minus the chamfer? 1.

2. How wide are the two grooves in the workpiece? 2.

3. What are the dimensions for the chamfers? 3.

4. What is the maximum allowable length of the workpiece? 4.

5. What scale is the print? 5.

6. Determine dimension A. 6.

7. What are the low limits for the groove diameters? 7.

8. What is the linetype for B? 8.

9. List all specifications for the material. 9.

10. What type of line is C? 10.

11. What is the part number? 11.

12. What is the tolerance on three place decimal dimensions? 12.

13. Who checked the print? 13.

14. What sheet number is the print? 14.

15. What is the maximum allowable width of the part? 15.

139
 REVISIONS
REV I DESCRIPTION DATE I APPROVED

A I REDRAWN 01/13 I MB
B
c

C~30~ ~ 025
o
®-----j
IETTTII-'TTTTTrr~ VV ---II-- .089
___ -!1 I 11_1_1 1..LlJ ..LlJ_I_1 J
II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
...11 .LLLLU_LLLLLLL
.500
I '--/30Y
.594 D R.03 TOOTH DETAIL
.297 .15 SCALE: 3X
.28 s:
III
n
I.. 4.39 .. I :T
::l
0.179 CD
R.12 ~
... III
Q.
CD
o"" 10"
!II
."

-
~.
::l

:c
(1 . 61) , I ==t--l-l SECTION DETAIL CD
III

~
-

Q.
SCALE: 2X ::l
(Q
.625 I .. 1.92 .860
NOTES:
6 30'
0

1. MIL-SPEC--GRAY PHOSPHATE
R.50
DRAWN BY.
MB DATE: 02/16 I COMPANY:
INTERPRET DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME Y14.5 - 2009.
CHECKED BY: DATE
G & B DESIGNS
PARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES RG 02/22 FRANKLIN , WISCONSIN
EDGES. BURRS. FLASH AND CLEAN . PART
NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED WITH 1116 TO .XX = ±.010 .xxx = ± .005 I APPROVEDBY: BH DATE: 03/01 I TITLE '
1/8 HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS .
BARS. PLATES. ETC . PARTS MAY BE SAW
FRACTIONS = ±.01S ANGLES = ±.So ""
M"'AT::::E""RI"'AL" "'N"'O- - - L -
1045
JAW-LEFT
CO, ANO "'NO" " " ' " O,""WI" THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION I ~~.& ~.~." SIZE DRAWING NO., REV
SPECIFIED. ~ CAST STEEL B 1211 c
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING w-.:::::::r GRAY PHOSPHATE SCALE SHEET
1 of 1

Fig. 10-20. Jaw-Left.

 Angles

JAW-LEFT QUIZ

Refer to Fig. 10-20. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What is the width of the teeth? 1.

2. List all the angles shown on the print. 2.

3. What is the total length of the slot? 3.

4. What is the thickness of the rib shown on the workpiece? 4.

5. What two dimensions are used to locate the position of 5.

the slot?
6. What does (1.70) mean? 6.

7. What is the length of the 11 ° angle? 7.

8. What is the maximum allowable total length of the 8.

workpiece?
9. What is the approximate distance for A? 9.

10. What is the tooth angle for one side of a tooth? 10.

11. What is the approximate length of the 6°30' angle? 11.

12. What is the approximate height of the part? 12.

13. What size are the tips of the teeth? 13.

14. What is the maximum allowable width of the part? 14.

15. What dimensions locate the start of the R.50 radius? 15.

141
 REVISIONS
REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

A
B
C

-1 r- 45°0'
.750

0.
-- j
875
1
1 :5:
I»
n
.375 (3.5) 135°0 ' ::r
:::l
CD

...
.;.
t 25°20'
~
I»
Q.
CD
en
3X 0.3 125

~
I\)
"'C

-
:!.
- - :::l

1 .602
- -
:::D
CD
I»
Q.
:::l
-+- (Q
I
.59 t

~~. 060
R.375

DRAWN BY COMPANY
Y14.S- 2009. MB DATE 03/04
INTERPRET DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES PER ASME
CHECKED BY.
G & B DESIGNS
PARTS MUST BE FREE OF ALL SHARP UNSPECIFIED TOLERENCES RG DATE 03/06
EDGES . BURRS. FLASH AND CLEAN. PART
SOUTH MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN
NO. TO BE STEEL STAMPED WITH 1116 TO .XX = ±.O10 .XXX = ±.OOS APPROVED BY ' BH DATE 03/12 TITLE :
1/8 HIGH CHARACTERS ON ALL PARTS.
BARS. PLATES. ETC. PARTS MAY BE SAW
FRACTIONS = ±.O15 ANGLES = ±.5° MATERIAL NO. 304 ADJUSTABLE HANGER BRACKET
CUT AND SANDED UNLESS OTHERWISE THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SIZE DRAWING NO. REV
SPECIFIED. MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
A 10-233
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
~ STAINLESS STEEL SCALE SHEET
1 of 1
Fig. 10-21 . Adjustable Hanger Bracket.
 Angles

ADJUSTABLE HANGER BRACKET

Refer to Fig. 10-21. Study the drawing and familiarize yourself with the views, dimensions, title block, and
notes. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

1. What dimensions locate the first hole from the bottom of 1.

the piece?
2. What is the inside radius of the hook? 2.

3. What angle is the tip of the hook? 3.

4. What dimension locates the start of the 45 degree angle? 4.

5. What would be the value of the outside radius A? 5.

6. What is the maximum allowable tolerance for the small 6.

holes?
7. What is the material number of the part? 7.

8. List all the radii. 8.

9. Convert 25°20' into decimal degrees. 9.

10. The center point of the top small hole is located what 10.
distance from center point of the small bottom hole?

11. List all the diameters. 11.

12. What is the minimum allowable thickness of the material? 12.

13. Calculate the tolerance for the length of the part. 13.

14. What is the tolerance for fractions? 14.

15. What standard is referenced for the drawing? 15.

143
 Unit
MACHINING DETAilS
11
~.. :.t:;.::. .;.r.!'''''.,- ~ ... ',"",")o.::""~""')o\~
I

After studying this unit, you will be able to :

D Determ ine the difference between a neck and a
groove.
D Determine the sizes of necks and grooves.
D Identify common types of slots. - - -
D Identify type and size of a keyway and keyseat.
D Distinguish between a boss and a pad.
D Identify a flat.

This unit groups together various topics that are

important to interpreting elementary level industrial
prints . Six of the eight topics share commonality
\ RADIUSED SHOULDER
and can be grouped under two headings: the fasten-
ing group and the assembly group. Each of the six
topics (necks, grooves, slots, keyways, keyseats, f-
and flats) is produced through machining opera-
tions. All six are used in the fastening and assembly - - -
of manufactured parts .
The remaining two topics, bosses and pads, deal
with material allowance found on workpieces.

NECKS (sometimes called "grooves " ) are

NECKS l NECKED SHOULDER
Fig. 11 - 1 . Drawings show radiused and necked shoulders
recesses in the outside diameters of workpieces to on machined parts.
allow mating objects to fit flush to each other. See
Fig . 11 - 1 . Necks are frequently used when it is
necessary to have a threaded diameter assemble NECK
flush to a shoulder. See Fig. 11-2.
Usually, a radius is found between stepped
diameters of a workpiece . However, when that
radius interferes with the proper assembly of two
objects, a necking operation is performed, Fig . 11-3 .
Necks can be dimensioned by stating the width
and depth of the recess, using a note, or by stating
the width and diameter of the recess, Fig. 11-4.
When the size of the neck is not important, no
dimension is given .

GROOVES

ANNULAR (ring-like) GROOVES can be found on

both inside and outside diameters of workpieces, Fig . 11 -2 . Neck is used on a threaded fastener.

144
 Machining Details

RADIUS PREVENTS NECK ALLOWS FOR

A FLUSH FIT A FLUSH FIT
Fig. 11-3 . Using a neck for a flush fit.

I I
+-+-
I I
I I
_ - --t~ - I--- '-...J

I-
Fig. 11-5 . Examples are given for various annular grooves .

The V-GROOVE is a familiar type of groove

found on pulleys used with V-belts. V-grooves are
produced in many forms, which vary in angles,
widths, and depth. See Fig.11-7.
~ Some shafts have specially designed grooves as
shown in Fig. 11-8. This requires the use of special
ground (machined) tooling.
An INTERNAL GROOVE is sometimes called a
- - - "recess" or "undercut." Some EXTERNAL
GROOVES on cylindrical workpieces may be called
a "neck" when they occur at a shoulder.

SLOTS

'-
C/J .625
Fig. 11-4. Two methods are shown for dimensioning neck.,.
Fig. 11-5 . Grooves are frequently used for mount-
ing fasteners, such as snap rings and retaining
rings. They are also used for installing seals, such
as O-rings, and 10r passageways for lubricating oils.
Annular grooves may be dimensioned by stating
the diameter and width or by providing the depth
and width. See Fig. 11-6.
Two principal types of SLOTS used on machines
and other parts include the tee slot (T-slot) and the
dovetail slot, Fig. 11-9. TEE SLOTS are used on
machine tables for the purpose of fastening down
devices such as vises, clamps, straps, fixtures, etc .
T-BOL TS are used with the table to fasten down
the holding devices and/or workpieces.
DOVETAIL SLOTS are used on machine tools as
slides, creating an interlocking assembly between
two machine parts to provide a reciprocating
movement.

145
 Machine Trades Print Reading

.182 w X .l250p

o 1.250

EXTERNAL GROOVE
EXTERNAL NECK

.200w X ~ .160

RECESS OR INTERNAL GROOVE

Fig . 11 -6 . Drawings present methods of dimensioning external and internal grooves .

Fig . 11-8 . Drawing shows an example of a special groove

on a shaft end .

Common applications of dovetails include cross-

slide and compound rest of a lathe , table and sad-
dle of a milling machine, and tool-slide on an
adjustable boring head.

KEYWAYS AND KEYSEATS

A KEYWAY is an internal groove machined in a

hole along its length which provides a slot for in-
serting a key .
A KEYSEA T is an external groove cut into a shaft
DEPTH along its lengt h to provide a seat for a key.
Fig . 11 -7 . Dimensioning requirements are given for a V - There are many types of keys used in keyways
groo ve on a pulley . and keyseats . Common keys include the flat ,

146
 Machining Details

TEE SLOT DOVETAIL

Fig. 11-9. Examples are given for a tee slot and a dovetail slot, used on machine tools.

square, and woodruff types . See Figs. 11-10,
1 1 - 1 1 , and 1 1 -1 2.
A key is used to secure a part to a shaft. Parts
secured in this manner include gears, pulleys, col-
lars (spacers), cranks, handles, hand wheels, and
cutting tools. A key provides a positive force and
prevents the part from slipping on the shaft.
Various tolerances are used for keys, keyways,
and keyseats. These specifications can be found in
reference texts such as the Machinery's Handbook
and the American Machinists' Handbook.
Keyways and keys eats for flat and square keys
are dimensioned with leaders. The width dimension
is given first, followed by the depth . The length is
given by using a direct dimension on the print. See
Fig. 11-13.
Woodruff keyseats, which are semicircular in
shape, are dimensioned with leaders. The number
of the woodruff keyseat and its location along the
shaft are given. See Fig. 11-14. These keyseats are
machined with special cutters called "woodruff cut-
ters." For positive identification, the number of the
woodruff cutter corresponds identically with the
number of the woodruff key.
The number of the woodruff key identifies its size .
The last two digits of the number give the diameter
of the key in eighths of an inch. The digits preceding
the last two digits give the width of the key in thirty-
seconds of an inch.
For example: 807 key
The number means the key is 8 / 32 in . x 7 / 8
in. or 1/4 in. wide x 7/8 in. diameter.
For precision fits such as required for inter-
changeable assemblies, keyway and keyseat dimen-
sions are given with limit dimensions, Fig . 11-15,
to provide proper fits.
FLATS
A FLAT is a depression found on a shaft or shank
that provides a seat for a setscrew. The setscrew is
used with another part to hold that object in place

SQUARE KEY

Fig. 11 - 10 . Three views show how a square key fits into a keyseat in a shaft .

147
 Machine Trades Print Reading

FLAT KEY

Fig . 11-11. Three views illustrate fit of a flat key in a keyseat .

WOODRUFF KEY

Fig . 11-12. Two views picture a woodruff key in a keyseat in a shaft.

~x.l
8 4
KEYWAY

3x~
A.
8 4
KEYSEAT

--------_/

B.

Fig . 11 - 13. Dimensioning requirements are shown : A - For a keyway (f lat key) . B-For a keyseat (flat key).

148
 Machining Details

No. 1211
WOODRUFF
KEYSEAT
LENGTH ~
I

No. 1211
WOODRUFF
KEYWAY

WOODRUFF KEYSEAT

WOODRUFF KEYWAY

Fig. 11 - 14. Woodruff key number (1 211 ) identifies its size : 1 2 / 32 x 1 1/ 8 or 3 / 8 x 1 3 / 8

(see text for explanation) .

A PAD is a raised surface shaped other than round

found on a casting to provide additional material to

1r
.2505 the workpiece.
.2487
r--
I
.2505
.2487
Both bosses and pads are machined to provide
smooth surfaces for mating parts. Bosses usually
have holes machined in or through them, while pads
are commonly found with a slot milled through
them . See Fig. 11-1 7.

1
1.078
1.076
KEYSEAT

KEYWAY

Fig . 11 - 15. Precision fits of keys, keyseats, and keyways BOSS

require limit dimensioning on drawing .

Fig . 11 - 16 . Drawing depicts flats on a tool shank.

on the shaft or shank. Many straight tool shanks

have flats on them, Fig. 11-16, to secure the tool
to a tool holder. SLOT PAD

BOSSES AND PADS

A BOSS is a cylindrical (round) raised surface

found on a casting or forging which provides addi-
tional material to the part. Fig . 11 - 17. Examples show a boss and a pad in two views .

149
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION I DRAj'4 NO ~8:50-1051
.0943 I 13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD . WISCONSIN 53005

.
0928
11 .-- *304 WOODRUFF KEY

~I
W.,34~ 0 d
l

r:2]
I
Dl
~
A ~

~
.B5<2J

t 0
z ql2lND ~~O
VV~
~~32
C\J«)
(Y)('t)rJ
SECTION ~-A- 0 0\ ~I' ~ I • • l!J'
t\J~ ~
If)
C\I ~ I - ' MIN. FULL
2 T~READ
~

I 0
~. ~~",- I-

ENDS-u
1••, /
16 x45
- - 1
s:
CHAMF. II)

~
n
=r
BOTH I 1---
5'

~ ~DIA.
CD
-t

,r
~

....
(J1
MIN:-GRfND
t CENTER
II)
c..
CD

~~AB
(J)
o 0 BOTH ENDS
0'1 ~2
""C

rOm
~.
•
~O)Ci
..
cO(,()<!J
~ -24UNF-2A
-
::::!,
:::l

: lJ
CD
II)

~ 'Q. 8 c..
5'
cc

CARBUJ2IZE. PER ES-12-2000 .018 To.022

TEMPER TO ROCKWELL - C 5"1-59

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIEO G

FINISH SPE CIFICATIONS F
MACHINED SURFAC ES lo/MA X E
GROUND SURFACES o/MA X D
DEC I MA L TOL XX t 0 10 XXX + .005 XXXX t 0005
PART NAME
SPINDLE SCALE 2.x C
FRACT ' O N TOL
A N GLE TOL. t 1°
• 0 10

MATERIAL
NUMBER 38-50-1050 OATE VO-I.3- B
4<OL20 CRSY2DIA. ~r.8
DRAWN
RE M OVE BURRS A N D SH A R P EDGES TO 015 MAX DESCRIPTION A
BY
DO NOT SCALE PART NUMBER 38-50-1051 C HE C KED
BY R.EY. CHANGE ECO DATE
-

Fig . 11 - 18 . Spindle .
 Machining Details

DIRECTIONS - QUIZ QUESTIONS

1. The industrial prints in this section will test your print reading ability.
2. Study the views, dimensions, title block, and notes in Figs. 11-18 through 11-25.
3. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

SPINDLE QUIZ

1. What size is the thread? 1.

2. What tolerance is given for the .250 diameter? 2.
3. How wide is the keyseat? 3.
4. Which diameter has the smallest tolerance? 4.
5. What is dimension 0 ? 5.
6. What size is the woodruff key? 6.
7. What size is the outside diameter of the thread? 7.
8. What scale is the print? 8.
9. What diameters are ground? 9.
10. What is the approximate depth of the keyseat? 10.
11. What is dimension 0 ? 11 .
12. Why are some length dimensions missing on the print? 12.
13. What dimension shows the location of the keyseat? 13.
14. What does ES mean? 14.
15. How long is the thread? 15.
16. To what depth is the part hardened? 16.
17. State what finish is required for ground surfaces. 17.
18. What thread series is specified on the print? 18.
19. What material is the part? 19.
20. What does 2A mean on the print? 20.

151
 --- 38°

2f
M

T
-IC\J
L
I \' / ,~
_3 R E F \..,.j...,..< 1885
1-.002-
-.000
32- '

lJ.:
A
f
W
C1. d
O'll~ d,
o :s:
OJ III
C\j o
~
S·
(I)

.752 12EAM ...-I

III
..... .751 0-
(I)
01 rJl

~E:I.
N
R I ...
"'C
64 ...S·
:Il
(I)
21 7 REF. F (.257) DRILL III
0-
32 I~
5I~ -18UNC-2B S·
co
TOL UNLESS SPECIFIED I fl'AATS MUST BE FREE Of' AU. SHARP EDGES. BURRS, fLASH
DECIMALS ±.005 AND CLEAH. "ART NO. TO BE ST[£L STANP'ED WITH 1/16 TO

NOTE: FRAcnONS ± 1/64

111 HIGH CHAJtACTfIltS ON AU PARTS, .... RS, ~TES. ETC
PARTS MAY 81E SAW CUT AHD SANDED UNLESS OTliERW/SE
ANGLES ± 2' SPEC.FlED.
MODIFY PUQCI-jASED CASTING, TlYU
NICKEL PLATE AS PEl<. SPEC,IFICATION "I00A"
o
c DIl~

A IWAS 1.
No.1 WA.S DATE IAP"YO FRANKLIN, WISCONSIN

Fig. 11-19. Drive Pulley.

 Machining Details

DRIVE PULLEY QUIZ

1 . How wide is the drive pulley groove at the outside? 1.

L.. How wide is the hub of the pulley? 2.

3. How wide is the pulley keyway? 3.

4. How deep is the pulley groove? 4.

5. What is the maximum outside diameter of the pulley? 5.

6. What is dimension 0 ?
7. How long is the threaded hole?
6.
7.
8. What is the approximate length of the keyway? 8.
9. What is dimension 0 ? 9.
10. What kind of material is used for the pulley? 10.
11 . What angle is the groove? 11 .
12. What diameter is the hub of the pulley? 12.
13. What is the low limit of the reamed hole? 13.
14. What does the large hidden circle represent? 14.
15. How far is the tapped hole from the end of the hub? 15.
16. What was revision /& ? 16.
17. What finish is required on the pulley? 17.
18. What does REF. mean? 18.
19. What is the maximum dimension from the center of 19.
the pulley to the bottom of the keyway?
20. What is dimension @] ? 20.

153
 F120NT VIEW

...L)( 45° C f-lAM .

32
7
32

d .942
)U .937

0\9
5 't(l')
\l)\9
32 -I ~
7
NC\i cD
G4 '& '&.
~
III
n
~
5'
CD

...-i
III
Q.
..... CD

.....
In
(11
+> I
Q§2
"'C
:#" 10 (DRILL) 5'
2-HOLE5 :l:J
CD
NOTE~ III
Q.
5'
12<./ FINISH ALL OVER to
MATERIAL - 2017 - T4 ALUM. OR.. 319 ALUM. CASTING.
""1IfTS MUST tilE nl£IE 0' AU. SHA~ £OeU. aUtttts. fLASH
± .005 ON FRACTIONAL DIME.NSIONS TOL. UNLIESS SPl:Clnm
DECIMALS ± .005 AND CL.EAH. "ART NO. TO tilE STUl ST..... KD MTM J/ 16 TO

FRACTIONS ± 1/ 64
1 /1 HI~ CHAftACTlE1tS ON ALL ""IIfTS, BAIItS, "-AT£S. ETC.
'AIIT'S MAY tiE SAW CVT AND $AHDm UHl[sS OTWDl"WI S[
ANGLES :t: 2' S"':Clnm.

n n.E

o
~O.
c
IY6
A

No. WAS OAf( I Al"Y O

Fig . 11 -20 . Cover Plate .

 Machining Details

COVER PLATE QUIZ

1. What type of sectional view is shown on the print? 1.

2. What does the dashed line circle in the front view 2.
represent?
3. How many holes are in the part? 3.
4. How long is the 3 1/2 diameter? 4.
5. What is the decimal equivalent of a #10 drill? 5.
6. Determine the high limit on the largest diameter. 6.
7. How far apart are the two # 1 0 holes from each other? 7.
8. What finish is required on the part? 8.
9. What is the maximum diameter allowed on the 9.
groove?
10. How wide is the groove? 10.
11. What is the overall length (thickness) of the part? 11.
12. How many surfaces are shown in the front view? 12.
13. What does the number 319 refer to on the print? 13.
14. Is the groove in the center (middle) of the part? 14.
15. What size is the large hole on the print? 15.

II

155
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD WISCONSIN 53005 '4-~iJ-0480

II
32

R. {PZI 4.090

¢.317
.313 II s:
Dl
(")
::r
:i"
CD

FZ -~-
I ...Dl-I
.....
C1
0)
3
4
1I U J L#
Cl.
CD
rn
...s·
"'C

-
4.338 _I /2.1J V.~ 7 6A. (./793)
%.007 :c
CD
/~ (3 Dl

(P.45(P I ® Cl.
s·
to
NOTE:
I 7.580
CAOMIUM PLATE:

G
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
FINISH SPECIFICATIONS
F
MACHINED SURFACES IZVMAX E
GROUND SURF"ACES J~AX
D
OI:CIMAL. TOL xx ~ 010 xxx ~ 00' xxx X ... T NAM.OEPTI-I ADJUSTMENT Pf..A
'!: 0005 C
""'ACTION TOL ! 010
ANGLIE TOL '!: ,0
B
R'I[MO\l1: .URNS AND SHA"''' I[OGIES TO A I WAS .1875 ~
0' ~ "'" A"
DO NOT SCALE
CHI£..\KIEOIG.R. F.

Fig. 11-21. Depth Adjustment Plate .

•
 Machining Details

DEPTH ADJUSTMENT PLATE QUIZ

1 . List all radii found on the print. 1.

2. How thick is the part? 2.

3. Give the two dimensions describing the location of 3.

the hole.
4. How wide is the slot? 4.

5. On what radius is the slot located? 5.

6. What is the actual height of the part? 6.

7. What type of finish does the part receive? 7.

8. What thickness was the part originally? 8.

9. What is the part number? 9.

10. What is dimension 0 ? 10.

11 .
11 . What is the width of the part?
12. What type of tolerance is used on the .1793 dimen- 12.
sian?
13. What is the scale of the print? 13.

14. How far is the horizontal centerline of the hole from 14.
the upper horizontal centerline of the slot?
15. How far apart are the horizontal centerlines of the slot? 15.

16. What is the maximum thickness allowed for the part? 16.

17. At what distance is the horizontal centerline of the 17.

hole from the lower horizontal centerline of the slot?
18. How far apart are the vertical centerlines of the slot? 18.
19. How many centerlines are shown on the print? 19.

20. What is the low limit for the 7.580 dimension? 20.

157
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
13 135 W EST LI SB ON ROAD BR OOKFIELD WIS CONSIN 53005 '3-24-6004

M
/~
/2 1 /'
/6
(NO TOOL MA.c2J(S) ~
l.t.J
~
QJ
~
\JJ
E/YLAI2(jED DETAIL
N,T.S,
, ~
...J -..... R
::-J '-..)
~ !J ~ ®@
~ ~ ~
col CO
OJ\() ~"
I ~~ R)~
~~ \'I)1't ~ &.
~
~ Q)
n
~
:;'
(I)

...-l
Q)

..... c..
145 Cl-IAM. 0 (I)
U1
ex>
16)( SECTION A-A .,...
C/l

A
...
:;'
I 60°CHAM,
-x :D
(I)
Q)

I - -- -------li CI I. / '''' © c..

::J
CO

I. - - - 7~

UNL ESS OTHERWISE SPE CIFIED G

FI N ISH S P ECIFIC A TIO N S F
..... ... CHINED SU R F A C E S lZ~ A X
E
G R OUND SURF A CES l [ 7 M A X
a Il C ' .... ... L. TOL
!. 0001
•• ! 010 .XJl !
mTN AM.CORE BIT EXT BLANK\ ' C AL< I /'./11 ~
C
,."A C TION TOL. ! 010
08-62-/£'30
A "'GL.~ TO L,... ! ,0

,,111:"' 0"' • • V" " . AN D S~AilU' e DGe. TO

DO NOT SCALE 43-24-~004

Fig . " -22 . Core Bit Ext . Blank .

 Machining Details

CORE BIT EXT. BLANK QUIZ

1. How long are the two flats shown on the print? 1.

2. What is the maximum allowable total length of the 2.
part?
3. What size is the groove diameter? 3.
4. What size chamfer is used on the thread? 4.
5. How wide is the groove? 5.
6. Is there a fit designated for the thread? If yes, what 6.
is it?
7. What is dimension 0 ? 7.
8. What is the low limit for the smallest diameter shown 8.
on the print?
9. What note refers to the external groove on the print? 9.
10. Determine dimension 0 10.
11. What is the distance between the two flats? 11.
12. What does N.T.S. mean? 12.
13. What is the outside diameter of the part? 13.
14. What is revision ® ? 14.
1 5. What kind of sectional view is shown in the front 1 5.
view?
16. What kind of material is used for the part? 16.
1 7. What engineering change order was used for Revision 1 7.
B?
18. What kind of shoulder is found between the 9/16 18.
diameter and the .681/.678 diameter?
1 9. Determine dimension 0 19.
20. How many centerlines are found on the print? 20.

159
 ~2

1r
+.002 n "90
.CO 5 -,000 I<.EAM
./68
21
R 32
R.-L , ,094
2

~
I
f =~ £ffi
=l~ T + pl~ &,
t
t
I KEYWAY DETAIL
~7(.201) DRILL
I
~--4 -I~
4 -20 UNC-28 ~ DQILL, ~-/3UNC'2B
2-f-\QLES 1- 51.. -----I
4

S
III
(")
:r
;:j'

TI
CD

::::~ ...-I
..... ri I< !I 1 ..II
J\
I- - . L
[--- III
C.
CD
0) a I/)
o f\j
...;:j'"'C

I -
:::c
CD
III
C.
;:j"
cc

NOTE.: PURCI-lASED CASTING &.1 1 I IOAT 9 _9 NO. REO'D, I

TOLEDO SCALE
MATERIAL: ALUMINUM "TENZALOyli
CASTING.
I& I I I IMACHINE USED ON.
O'REL.IANCE .....
OWI.ION C'TW'CCO ... _
WRAPPING .....cHINE"''!' PlANT
FRANKSVILLE. WISCONSIN &3128
... ,,~
5~,.bn·
EOUIPMENT
A TITLE
A IWAS ;tlO/.t03 100
IIl'ER TO ASSY.

.&. TIWAS ."'61.'1~ LINK ARM

. r--- UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

AJADDED KE.YWAY ~ ± 1/64 ON ALL FRACTIONAL OIM£NSIO".S MATfltlAl6EE NOTE

II!::.1wA~ ~/O J2~ ± OIOON ALL FRACTIONAL MACHIN£D

No.1 CHANGE BY DATE ! 1~~2D~:;~~ ~:C~::~LO~:~~~I:NNS~ONS .P"'D.

Fig. 11·23. Link Arm.

 Machining Details

LINK ARM QUIZ

1. What is the minimum total height of the part? 1.

2. What is the total length of the part? 2.
3. What is revision & ? 3.
4. How long (deep) is the 1/2-13 UNC thread? 4.
5. What diameter is the boss on the part? 5.
6. How much clearance is there between the keyway 6.
and a 311 6 key?
7. How far apart are the 1/4 tapped holes? 7.
8. Was the keyway depth increased or decreased from 8.
the last revision?
9. How far is the reamed hole from the 1/2-13 UNC 9.
threaded hole?
10. Is the right side view necessary? 10.
11. How much does the part taper in its length? Give 11 .
answer in TPI.
12. Determine dimension 0 12.
13. How much was the thickness of the link arm base 13.
increased?
14. What kind of material is "TENZALOY"? 14.
1 5. What is the approximate depth of the keyway? 1 5.
16. How many surfaces are finished? 16.
1 7. What is the lower limit of the reamed hole? 1 7.
18. What size taps are used on the part? 1 8.
1 9. How far does the top of the larger boss extend above the 1 9.
top of the base?
20. Where is Toledo Scale located? 20.

161
 *21 (.159) DRILL
"* 10· 32 UNC-2B
NOTE: BREAK ALL SHARP GORNERS
EXCEPT AS NOTED.
ALL SMALL RADII - R I~
PURCHASED CASTING
NICk:EL PLATE - FINISH·/3G

\~1 r---- 1'5

16

GI I- -I·gl Ri (TYP.) :s:

Q)
(")
~
5'
CD
F (.251) DRlLL ...-I
Q)
5- 18 UNC-2B r()j«) c..
.... I~ ~k DR ILL- 2 HOLE.S
CD
0')
N DO NOT c'SINK
C\I
.,
(f)

:::!.
...
:J

:lJ
CD
Q)
c..
R~
:J
to

IJ::. OAJ..E
0-8 N°ONE ~!O_L..~8.<Jc~9~c~o~_.. ~ IO~
/'~~::h«.
& I
~ ,MACHINE USED ON. -- - r r
'llffW"tl'tNG MACHtNERY PLANT

& 0(002. R-L TITLE

FIlANItSVILU. WISCONSIN 53128 EQUIPMENT

"fFER TO ASSY.
& 81511200A PIVOT LEVER-
& TOLERANCES
UNLESS OTHERWISIE SPECIFIED DR .... N BY MATERIAL
A.... I I± 1/6. ON ALL FRACTIONAL 01MI(N510,..5 CAST IRON
8.... I I± OIOON ALL FRACTIONAL MACHI,..£O

DIMENSIONS
+ 002 ON ALL DECIMAL DIMiENS'ONS
'-;-;,...,--='-'==-
r.. ,. .. ·o.
~ CHANGE BY DATE ± 1/2 OEGAIEIE ON .... NGUL"R DIMIENSION5

Fig. 11-24. Pivot Lever .

•
 Machining Details

PIVOT LEVER QUIZ

1. Determine dimension 0 1.
2. How many workpieces are required? 2.
3. What size are the small radii on the print? 3.
4. Determine dimension 0 . 4.
5. How far are the two drilled holes from the centerline 5.
of the small tapped hole?
6. What is dimension ~ ? 6.
7. What finish is required on the casting? 7.
8. What kind of line is ~ ? 8.
9. What do the REF. dimensions represent? 9.
10. Determine dimension 0 . 10.
11. What size is the fillet on the casting? 11.
1 2. Determine dimension 0 . 12.
13. What does the "B" signify on the thread 13.
designation 5116-18 UNC-2B?
1 4. What machine is this part used on? 1 4.
15. What views are shown on this print? 15.
16. Determine dimension @] . 16.
17. What is the width of the large machined surface? 17.
18. What tolerance is used on fractional dimensions? 18.
19. Determine dimension G 19.
20. Which view shows the shape of the small machined 20.
surface?

163
 MILWAUKEE ELECTRIC TOOL CORPORATION
13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD WISCONSIN 53005

/7 7 T.3
~4DI2ILL- LJ 16 - -v 8
1------- 6. f2.S - - -
4-I-\OLES
1----3.0<02. •I

1.5~2---

1 i Y50

---,-.-
~Iro r
I
T·260
.250

1--- \'It\!

L-=---+- 8 0~
o
+. I'

~
~~ f---~-u
N "it
i-----r----r-----r---T~
V
ro
~ -----2-------r---
- - - - - - - - - - - - t - - - - - ----r N
;;;
N
II)

\9
...:.
I
I\ {if/' II
~-
I
0
0
IJ)
.2541J
U)

:5:
III
o
~
s·
CI)
.234
-I
~

.... ENLAI2.GED DETAIL III

a.
CI)
en
.j:I>
esC-ALE' 2=1
.,
II)

~
~

f---2. <025 IAI· I '~ ...s·

:::c
" CI)

~ 38 -16UNC-2B
III
1------- 5.250 --------1 a.
Bl :j'
to
4-HOLES

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED G

-
FINISH SPECIFICATIONS F
MACHINED SURFACES 12~AX
--t
E .
GROUND SURFACES 3~AX -
DECIMAL TOl. XX ~ 010 XXX ~ OO~ XXXX
. FULL~
FRACTION TOL :': 0'0

B
~ fA:
DO NOT SCALE 44-34-0110
Fig. 11-25. Motor Mount.
 Machining Details

MOTOR MOUNT QUIZ

1 . How wide is the opening of the T-slot? 1.

2. What is the total length of the workpiece? 2.

3. How many holes are tapped? 3.

4. Determine dimension 0 4.
5.
5. How thick is the workpiece?
6. How far apart horizontally are the two tapped holes 6.
on the left from the two counterbore holes on the left?

7. What is the minimum total depth of the T-slot? 7.

8. What is the maximum total depth of the T-slot? 8.

9. Determine dimension ~ 9.

10. What size are the counterbores? 10.

11 . How far apart are the two counterbore holes on the 11 .

left from the two counterbore holes on the right?
12. What is the upper limit dimension for the width at the 12.
bottom of the T-slot?
13. How far are the 3/8-1 6 tapped holes from the horizon- 13.
tal centerline of the workpiece?
14. Determine dimension [I] 14.

15. How deep are the counterbores? 15.

16. What is the distance between the two upper counter- 16.
bore holes and the two lower tapped holes?
17. What is the lower limit dimension for the width at the 17.
bottom of the T-slot?
18. What is the upper limit dimension on the width of the 18.
workpiece?
19. What size are the tapped holes? 19.

20. What is the maximum thickness from the bottom of 20.

the T -slot to the bottom of the workpiece?

165
 Unit GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING
AND lOlERANCING
r
After studying this unit, you will be able to:
o Identify various geometric symbols.
o Identify datum surfaces.
o Define various terms relating to geometric
tolerancing.
o Interpret the meaning of geometric symbols on
a print.
Advancements in technology have brought about
greater control in the accuracy of machined parts.
Still, it is almost impossible to manufacture a perfect
part, so it becomes necessary to define the amount
of variation permitted to a specific form of a part.
These factors have led to the use of a drafting
system commonly known as "geometric dimension-
ing and tolerancing."
The methods of applying geometric dimension-
ing and tolerancing to conventional dimensioning
is through the use of geometric symbols that have
been recommended by the American National Stan-
dards Institute (ANSI).
This unit, then, is a brief introduction to geometric
tolerancing . Information contained in the unit is a
partial, summary version of U.S. dimensioning and
tolerancing practices. For more complete and de-
tailed information, refer to the publication: American
National Standard Y14.5M-1994, DIMENSIONING
AND TOLERANCING.
TERMS
Several' terms appearing in this unit need ' to be
defined prior to their use:
1f'L~,;'mli.:.'..!Ii';r~,~"cI,+~m, ctmJiRfL+CU1:fl'~llo1::l,15U'­
tion of a part, such as a surface, hole, thread, or
groove.
DATUM: Exact point, axis, or plane serving as the
origin from which location or geometric charac-
teristics of features of a part are derived.
DATUM FEATURE: Actual feature of a part used as
a datum .
BASIC DIMENSION: A numerical value stating the
166
>- •
exact size, contours , orientation , or position of
a feature or datum .
TOLERANCE: Total amount a dimension is allowed
to vary. The difference between maximum and
minimum limits.
LIMITS: The maximum and minimum size allowed
on a dimension.
Various other new terms will be defined as they
appear within this unit.
APPlICA TION
GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING is specifying the
allowable variation permitted on exact form or true
position on part features .
Geometric tolerancing is applied to five areas of
concern: Form, Profile, Orientation, Locational, and
Runout Tolerances.
FORM tolerances control the form or shape of
various geometric figures. Form tolerances control
straightness, flatness , circularity (roundness ), and
cylindricity. Form tolerances are not related to
datums.
PROFILE tolerances are used to control form, or
combination of size , form, and orientation . They
specify a constant boundary along the true profile
within which all points or elements of the surface
must lie. Profile tolerances include line profile and
surface profile.
ORIENTATION tolerances control angularity ,
perpendicularity, and parallelism.
LOCAnONAL tolerances define the allowable
variation of a feature from the exact or true posi-
+i1Ul, 'b'1ruWl, 'Ul,+hfb irrdwn~.
RUNOUT tolerances control the relationships of
one or more features of a part to its axis.
STANDARD SYMBOLS
The accompanying chart, Fig. 12- 1, shows the
various symbols used in describing the character-
istics found in Form, Profile, Orientation , Locational ,
 Geometric Dimensioning and To/erancing

AMERICAN TYPE OF
CHARACTERISTIC SYMBOL
NATIONAL TOLERANCE
STANDARD
DIMENSIONING STRAIGHTNESS -
AND
TOLERANCING FOR FLATNESS 0
INDIVIDUAL FORM
FEATURES CIRCULARITY (ROUNDNESS) 0
CYLINDRICITY AI
FOR
INDIVIDUAL
PROFILE OF A LINE n
PROFILE
OR RELATED
FEATURES
PROFILE OF A SURFACE Q
ANGULARITY L

ORIENTATION PERPENDICULARITY -.L

PARALLELISM II
FOR POSITION -$
RELATED
FEATURES LOCATION CONCENTRICITY 0
SYMMETRY ---

RUNOUT
CIRCULAR RUNOUT ;t OR /'
TOTAL RUN OUT UOR l!/'
Fig. 12-1 . Geometric characteristic symbols. (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers)

and Runout tolerances. Other standard symbols
adopted by ANSI Y14.5M-1994 and used in this
unit include: 0 , R, LJ, v , w, and D.
The symbol 0 means DIAMETER. It is used in-
stead of the word" diameter" before the actual size.
It appears as 01 .00, meaning one inch diameter.
The symbol R means RADIUS. It is used instead
of the word "radius" before the actual size. It would
appear as R 1.5, meaning 1 1/2 inch radius.
The symbol LJ represents a SPOTFACE or
COUNTERBORE. It appears in front of the dimen-
sions of a spotface or counterbore. See Fig. 12-2.
07 THRU
LJ 014
foUNTERBORE
(OR SPOTFACE)
SYMBOL
The symbol v represents a COUNTERSINK. It
appears before the dimensions of a countersink as
in Fig. 12-3.
The symbol W shown in Fig . 12-4 represents the
word DEPTH. It precedes that dimension and refers
to the depth of a feature, such as a hole.
The symbol 0 indicates that a part feature is
SQUARE. This symbol precedes the dimension
denoting the size of the square. See Fig. 12-5.
¢ 6.5 THRU
V ¢ 10 X 90·
'------...L....-----J!o U NTE RS INK
SYMBOL

Fig . 12-3. Countersink symbol. (ASME)

GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE SYMBOLS

GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE SYMBOLS are en-

Fig . 12-2. Counterbore or spotface symbol. (ASME) closed in a rectangular box containing the allowed

167
 Machine Trades Print Reading

09.4-9.8
T 20

' - - - -_ _...1...--_-----/ LPTH

SYMBOL 1 ~1 · 005IAI
Fig . 12-6 . Application of datum feature symbol and feature
control frame .

Fig . 12-4 . Depth symbol. (ASME)

~D6 I. .- - ,! DATUM A

t----, \SQUARE
SYMBOL

Fig. 12-5 . Square symbol. (AS ME)

tolerance at datum with a leader pointing to the

feature to which it applies, Fig. 12-6 .
DATUM B
Fig. 12-7. Datum feature symbol applied to part .
DATUM FEATURE SYMBOL

The DATUM SYMBOL shown in Fig. 12-7 con-

sists of a frame containing the datum reference let-
101·0031

J '-
ter. An equilateral triangle connected to the square
identifies the feature.
CHARACTER TOLERANCE
SYMBOL
FEATURE CONTROL SYMBOL
Fig . 12-8. Feature control frame .
All geometric symbols require a feature control
panel. It consists of a rectangular frame containing the
geometric character, followed by the allowable tolerance.
DATUM
See Fig. 12-8. REFERENCE
[
FEATURE CONTROL SYMBOL USING
DATUM REFERENCES '--1L----'--I.0-0-5""-1A---'I
All orientation , locational, and runout tolerances
must be related to a reference (datum). This relation-
ship is stated in the feature control symbol. The datum
CHARACTER
SYMBOL
J L TOLERANCE
reference letter is placed after the geometric symbol
and the tolerance, as shown in Fig. 12-9. Fig . 12-9. Parts of feature control frame .

168
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

DATUMS
ACTUAL DATUM
SURFACE SURFACE A DATUM is defined as being a plane, point, line, or
OF PART (PART) axis of a part. A datum is used as a reference base or
exact position from which orientation, location, and
runout tolerances are checked .
DATUM

E PLANE DATUM PLANE/DATUM SURFACE

DATUM PLANES are theoretical exact reference

~~~~a-~~~~ bases.
DATUM SURFACES and FEATURES are actual
surfaces or features of an object used to establish
datums that include any surface and feature irreg-
DATUM ularities. See Fig. 12-10.
FEATURE Datum surfaces can be controlled through the use
of various symbols. For example, to control flatness
CONTACT for a datum surface , the symbol 0 is used , Fig.
THEORETICAL POINTS 12-11 . Also note that the difference in height be-
SURFACE tween the high points and low points of datum sur-
Fig. 12- 10. Actual surface of part contacting theoretical face B must be within a tolerance of .005 inches .
(datum) surface . This is the surface flatness tolerance of the part.

r
.625 ±.010

I101·0051
DATUM/
SURFACE
LOW
LIMIT

~HIGH
1 / LIMI T
.615 .635

~
· t ~~____- -__~~~~~_
[ .005 GEOMETRIC
TOLERANCE ZONE
Fig . 12-11. Specifying flatness of a surface.

169
 Machine Trades Print Reading

Besides the flatness tolerance required for surface AREA~

B, a size tolerance of ±.010 inch must be held
between datum surface B and another surface. The SIZE @01.2
size between the high points of datum surface Band
the high points of the other surface specified must
not exceed the high limit of .635 inches. Also , the
size between the low points of surface B and the
low points of the other surface specified must not
be less than the low limit of .615 inches . DATUM TARGET NUMBER
In summary, when machining both surface Band Fig. 12-13. Datum target symbol.
the other surface, two concerns must be taken in-
to account: datum surface B must be held to a
is left blank for datum points.
flatness tolerance of .005 inch and still be within
A datum point is shown on the surface as an
a size tolerance of ±.010 inch with another
" XU. A leader connects the point and the datum
surface.
target symbol. See Fig . 12-12. The details of the
datum target symbol are shown in Fig. 12-13.
DATUM TARGETS A datum area is marked with diagonal lines. The
outer edge of the area is marked with a phantom
line. See Fig. 12-14.
Often, an entire surface doesn't need to be ma-
chined . In these cases, only specific points or areas
on the surface require machining. DATUM TARGETS
DATUM AXIS
are used to identify these points and areas.
The datum target symbol is a circle divided by a
horizontal line. In the lower part of the circle is the A centerline is used as a datum feature on cylin -
identification of the datum point. This identification drical and symmetrical parts. See Figs. 12-15 and
includes the datum surface letter, followed by the 12-16. Datum B is the DATUM AXIS of the part .
number of the point. The upper half of the circle The datum axis shown is perpendicular to datum
contains the diameter of the datum area . This area surface A.

t t
.5 .5

,
.5
,
.5

~ .5 .5~
Fig . 12- 12 . Datum points on a surfa ce.

170
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

06.5

Fig.12-14. Identifying datum areas. Fig. 12- 15. Datum axis on a tapered cylinder .

-~
L------\----
DATUM AXIS
Fig . 1 2- 1 6. Centerline as a datum axis .

GEOMETRIC SYMBOLS AND THEIR MEANING Circularity IQI

Geometric symbols have been established for
form tolerances, profile tolerances, orientation
tolerances, locational tolerances, and runout
tolerances.
FORM TOLERANCES
Form tolerance symbols depict circularity, cylin-
dricity, straightness , and flatness.
CIRCULARITY applies to a surface of revolution
making all points of a surface intersected by a
cutting plane perpendicular to a common axis and
equidistant (same distance) from axis, Fig. 12-17 .
Circularity tolerance states the maximum varia-
tion allowed between maximum and minimum radii.
Fig. 1 2 -1 8. The. 00 5 inch wide tolerance zone for
roundness is between two concentric circles. The
actual round surface of the cylinder must lie within
the .005 inch wide tolerance zone.

171
 Machine Trades Print Reading

TOLERANCE PLANE
Cylindricity rm
CYLINDRICITY applies to a surface of revolution
ZONE PERPENDICULAR making all points on the surface equidistant along
TO SHAFT a common axis.

//1 Cylindricity tolerance states a tolerance zone be-

tween two concentric cylinders within which all
points on a surface must lie. See Fig . 12-19.
Cylindricity takes into consideration roundness ,
straightness, and taper of a cylinder.

I Straightness El

v // STRAIGHTNESS is a condition where all points

I
I
on any surface or axis must lie in a straight line.
Straightness tolerance creates a tolerance zone
(two parallel planes) in which all points on a sur-
[QJ Fig. 12-17. Circularity. face must lie, as shown in Figs . 12-20 and 12 -21 .

DRAWING

INTERPRETATION
.005 TOLERANCE
ZONE

MINIMUM
RADIUS MAXIMUM
RADIUS

Fig. 12-18. Circularity tolerance zone.

172
 Geometric Dimensioning and T olerancing

DRAWING

r"QI!·006!

INTERPRETATION
.006 TOLERANCE
ZONE

L.006 TOLERANCE ZONE

I ):j I Fig. 12-19. Cylindricity of a surface.

DRAWING

INTERPRETATION

ZONE

I I Fig . 12- 20 . Straightness of a surface .

173
 Machine Trades Print Reading

- ¢. 605 -15 6
1-1·0151

- - -

Fig. 12-21 . Specifying axis straightness.

Flatness [Q) Flatness tolerance creates a tolerance zone

FLATNESS requires all points on a surface to lie formed by two parallel planes between which the
in one plane. entire surface must lie. See Fig . 12-22 .

DRAWING

INTERPRETATION
TOLERANCE ZONE

Fig . 12-22. Specifying flatn ess of a surface .

174
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

PROFILE TOLERANCES profile . Profile of a line is used when the entire sur-
face control is not required. It is also used on shapes
with varying cross-sectional dimensions along their
Profile tolerance symbols include profile of a line length or width, as shown in Fig . 12- 23.
and profile of a surface.
Profile (surface) [QJ
Profile (line) Inl PROFILE OF A SURFACE states all points along
PROFILE OF A LINE states all points on a line must an entire surface must lie within the specified
lie within the specified tolerance zone of the true tolerance zone of the true profile . See Fig. 12- 24.

DRAWING

INTERPRETATION

.010 TOLERANCE
ZONE

In I Fig . 12 -23. Profile of a lin e.

175
 Machine Trades Print Reading

DRAWING

,.--_---, / n I· (lui]

INTERPRETATION

.004 TOLERANCE ZONE

In I Fig . 12-2 4 . Profile of a surface .

ORIENTATION TOLERANCES Perpendicularity CD

PERPENDICULARITY requires a surface or axis to
Orientation tolerance symbols cover angularity, be at a right angle (90°) to a datum plane or axis ,
perpendicularity, and parallelism. Fig. 12-26.

Angularity ~ Parallelism GlJ

ANGULARITY applies to a surface or axis which PARALLELISM requires that a surface or axis re-
is at a specified angle (other than 90°) to a datum mains the same distance at all points from a datum
plane or axis. See Fig . 12-25. plane or axis, as shown in Fig . 12-27.

176
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

DRAWING

o
4U y
T

INTERPRETATION

.003 TOLERANCE
ZONE

o
~ Fig . 12- 25 . Angularity of a surface .

LOCA TIONAL TOLERANCES within rectangles, thus creating basic dimensions

Locational tolerance symbols include true posi-
tion, concentricity, and symmetry.
True Position [:±]
TRUE POSITION defines a tolerance zone within
which the axis or center plane of a feature is allowed
to vary from the true (exact) position.
Coordinate tolerancing of a location provides a
square tolerance zone. This zone results from
coordinate plus and minus tolerancing, as shown
in Fig. 12-28.
Locational tolerancing increases a tolerance zone
by 57 percent more area by using a round tolerance
zone. This occurs by placing the location dimension
with exact values. The round tolerance zone, Fig .
1 2 -29, is centered at the intersection of these basic
dimensions.
Locational tolerancing is applied to a feature
control on MMC (maximum material condition) ,
LMC (least material condition) , or RFS (regardless
of feature size) basis.
MMC uses a modifier symbol @. LMC uses a
modifier symbol CD. RFS is assumed when there is
no modifier. These modifiers should appear in the
feature control symbol following the tolerance , as
shown in Fig. 12-30.
MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION (MMC)
means that internal features such as holes and slots
would be at their low limit (minimum) size, whereas

177
 Machine Trades Print Reading

INTERPRETATION
BOUNDARY OF
TOLERANCE ZONE
AND DATUM SURFACE
ARE PERPENDICULAR
DRAWING

.003 TOLERANCE ZONE

1 I 1 Fig. 12-26. Perpendicularity of a su rface.

INTERPRETATION
BOUNDARY OF TOLERANCE
DRAWING
ZONE IS PARALLEL TO
~...,....,---.----, DATUM SURFACE
II 1·0021 A 1

II
I

1 II 1 Fig. 12-27. Parallelism of a surface.

178
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

INTERPRETATION
DRAWING

TOLERANCE
ZONE

o
o
+1
-x- To
o
o ·0
o ~&
o
o

t
L '---___+_------1

~ 1.000 ±.01O I--

MAX. TOLERANCE
I-- --I 1 .000
= 1.4 X .020 .028
Fig . 12-28 . Coordinate tolerance and tolerance zone .

DRAWING INTERPRETATION
¢.028
TOLERANCE
ZONE

T
o
o
-x- To
o o

L L---_+___-----' l L...-------+-------.J

I-- --I
1 .000 I-- 1 .00
Fig . 12-29 . Locational tolerance and tolerance zone .
---I

179
 Machine Trades Print Reading

1-$-10 .005 @ 1A B
Fig . 12-30 . Feature control symbol for locational tolerancing.

external features such as a shaft would be at their Example :

high limit (maximum) size .
EXAMPLE :
MMC of a .750-. 752 hole is .750 inch .
MMC of a .750-. 752 shaft is .752 inch .
Tolerance at MMC is interdependent on the
fe at ure size . If actual feature size has varied from
MMC , the increase in the tolerance is allowed equal
t o that amount of variance.
If a .010 inch tolerance zone is allowed for a
.750- .752 inch hole at MMC, Fig. 12-31 , the
tolerance zone would increase to .011 inch for
a .751 inch hole and .012 inch for a .752 inch
hole. Tolerance increases are equal to amount of
hole diameter change.
LEAST MATERIAL CONDITION (LMC) means
that the internal features such as holes and slots
would be at their high limit (maximum) size.

DRAWING

0.750-.752
I-$- 10 .0 10 @ 1A B

-.----

1
4 .0 1

INTERPRETATION

TO LE RANC E ZONE TOL ERANCE ZONE

FOR 0.750 HOLE FOR 0 .752 HOLE
0.750 0 .752

0 .010 0.012
TOLERANCE TO LE RANCE
4.0 ZONE 4.0 ZONE
Fi g. 12- 31 . Location al t ol eran ce appli ed to a hole at MMe .

180
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

External features such as a shaft would be at their Example:

low limit (minimum) size.
EXAMPLE:
LMC of a .750-.752 hole is .752 inch.
LMC of a .750-.752 shaft is .750 inch.
Tolerance at LMC is also interdependent on the
feature size. If actual feature size has varied from
LMC, the increase in the tolerance is allowed equal
to that amount of variance.
If a .010 inch tolerance zone is allowed for a
.750-.752 hole at LMC, Fig. 12-32, the tolerance
zone would increase to .011 inch for a .751 hole
and .012 inch for a .750 hole. Tolerance change
is equal to hole diameter change.
REGARDLESS OF FEATURE SIZE (RFS) means
that the tolerance zone is limited to the specified
value and does not change regardless of the actual
size of the feature.

DRAWING

0.750-.752
[-$- [0 .010 CD [A B

INTERPRETATION

TOLERANCE ZONE TOLERANCE ZONE

FOR 0.750 HOLE FOR 0.752 HOLE
0.750 0.752

0.012 0.010
TOLERANCE TOLERANCE
4.0 ZONE 4.0 ZONE
Fig . 12-32 . Locational tolerance applied to a hole at LMC .

181
 Machine Trades Print Reading

Example : Fig. 12-33, regardless of whether the hole is

If a .01 0 inch tolerance is allowed for a .750- .750, .751, or .752 inches in diameter. Toler-
. 752 hole the tolerance zone remains the same, ance at RFS is independent of feature size .

DRAWING

0.750- .752
I-$- 10.010 1A 8

-.----

1
4 .0 1

INTERPRETATION

0.750-.752 LOCATED
AT TRUE POSITION
WITHIN .010

0 .010

Fig . 12-33 . Locational tolerance applied to a hole at RFS.

182
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

Concentricity ~ RUNOUT TOLERANCE

CONCENTRICITY exists when the axes of each
part feature's surface of revolution are common to
the datum axis. See Fig. 12-34.
Symmetry I I = CIRCULAR RUNOUT provides control of circular
SYMMETRY exists when a part feature is sym-
metrically arranged about the center plane of a
datum feature. See Fig. 12-35.
Runout tolerance symbols represent circular
runout and total runout .
Circular Runout [Z]
elements of a surface applied independently at any
measuring location as the part is rotated 360
degrees. See Fig. 12-36.

DRAWING

1
o .752
01.000 - - - I--
.750

10 1·0021 A 1

INTERPRETATION
-
.002 DIAMETER
TOLERANCE
ZONE
- -
- - -
- - ==-=
.- - , -

I 0 I Fig. 12-34 . Concentricity of a part .

183
 Machine Trades Print Reading

DRAWING

f
1.875 ±.002 -+--- 1- - - .750 ±.002

INTERPRETATION

.003 DIAMETER

=-r
TOLERANCE
--------- ZONE

I I Fig . 12-35. Symmetry of a slotted part .

Total Runout ~ tional characteristics (roundness, concentricity ).

TOTAL RUNOUT provides control of all circular
elements of a surface applied simultaneously to all
measuring locations as the part is rotated 360
degrees. See Fig. 12 -37.
Runout is applied to surfaces at right angles to
a datum axis and to surfaces existing around a
datum axis .
Circular runout applied to surfaces existing around
a datum axis controls cumulative form and loca-
Circular runout applied to a surface at right angles
to a datum axis controls wobble.
Total runout applied to surfaces existing around
a datum axis controls cumulative form and loca-
tional characteristics such as ci rcularity , concentric-
ity , angularity , straightness, taper, and profile of a
surface.
Total runout applied to a surface at right angles
to a datum axis controls wobble and flatness .

184
 Geometric Dimensioning and T olerancing

DRAWING

INTERPRETATION

, .003 TOLERANCE
ZONE
I I
I I

- - -
-----1 1 I I
- - - r----

I~
WHEN ROTATING THIS SURFACE
360·, AN INDICATOR PL ACED AGAINST
THIS SURFACE SHOULD REMAIN
WITHIN THE TOLERANCE ZONE
[ZJ Fig . 12-36 . Circular runout (wobble) on a shouldered
surface .

185
 Machine Trades Print Reading

DRAWING

j U I.OO3 I AI

- - - - - -

INTERPRETATION

003 TOLERANCE -
ZONE

- -
- -
......

t
I I
I I

- - - - - -

I I
I I

- -
.........
- -

WHEN ROTATING THIS SURFACE

360·, AN INDICATOR PLACED AGAINST
THIS SURFACE SHOULD REMAIN
WITHIN THE TOLERANCE ZONE
lui Fig . 12 -37. Total runout on a shaft diameter .

186
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

DIRECTIONS-GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING QUIZ

Match each term or description with the correct symbol by placing the appropriate letter in the blank
provided.

1 . Datum identification symbol

A EiiJ 1.
2. Geometric symbol that specifies a tolerance zone B V 2.
between two concentric circles.
3. RFS C 0 3.
4. Geometric symbol denoting a tolerance zone between 4.
two concentric cylinders.
D [ID
5. Symbol for counterbore E U 5.
6. Geometric symbol used to identify a tolerance of 6.
location. F ;C/
7. Datum target symbol 7.
8. Depth
G CD 8.
9. Flatness H @ 9.
10. Symbol requiring a surface or axis to be at right angle 1 O.
to a datum plane or axis.
«)
11 . Profile of a line J 0 1 1.
12. Symbol requiring axes of each part features' surface 12.
of revolution to be common to the datum axis. K
13. Circular runout L ® 13.
14. Internal features (holes, slots) are at their low limit. 14.
15. Parallelism
M -$ 15.
N ~
0 LJ
P L-

a II
R n
S /
T 0
U 0
v 0
w T"

187
 Machine Trades Print Reading

DIRECTIONS - POSITIONAL TOLERANCING QUIZ

Complete th e chart for the part below by providing positional tolerance values for the hole shown as
the ma ch ined hole size changes .

r
1.00

i (/J .505
.500

2.00-J
HOLE POSITIONAL
SIZE TOLERANCE

.505

.504

.503

.502

.501

.500

188
 8 \ 1822..00'" I
¢_,750_000
+oo~
REAM -THRU
+.005
.83B-· 000
",0
00
V~;:::".,?.\ NU\'""\BE...M \N R~\SED L~\\ c::...R\NC:.,
00
+i -t
;/~~
~ it
/~~ BOSS- \30\1-\
f\
eX) (Jl
eX)

~k~
SIDES
~

,
R:x?')
I 81182200A
~ETTE"" F" ((1).257) DRILL -,H",U
__ ~ il,. -15 NC. ,AP - , H«.U
4
~7 (~.20\) Df<ILL- THRU I I SAND , 0 "RE\'J\OVE- DRAFT
l - cO N.C. ,AP - ,\-leu .34- ANGLE...,&,
4
r\~ \/1 I
IV
ill
r5 ~~
I
I Ii
t
\;t I I
I :\
II I
I I II I
C\J II I 1'1 I
I -I~ I
II I I
.....
(Xl
r-----..... =='1
=~I
I - T,l'E<o
-!, TiT
I
11
-jJ
'!I I" II'"
::1 I:: l4- -=----
to

t
I ( I I I
II
II I I -~ I\. I
I III I
II I
I II I I I
I
I
I I I
I I I
~1~ I 1\ _I 1\
5

NO,E:- 1-5
IA
~I.9~L..~8.9c~~~~D~_'~ I b~~'
DAn NO. REQ'D. \

MA,ERIAL - ALUMINUM C5TG\. "TENZI>. LOY "

&. MACHINE USED ON. WAN'PING IlllACHlHEAY ..... ANT
FIIAIIUVlLLE. WISCONSIN 13121 EQUIPMENT
MODEL C;<\O AU,OMATIC
& REFEft TO A.SST.
TITLE

&:. LEVER - OVERWR"'-P DRIVE

A MP-.C\---\INE Y £. """D~D NO"'::
R5 b-S TOLI[RANCI[S
UHLII:SS OTHERWISE SPII:CI"-'I[O
D. . . . OY A.L.P SCA.LE F LJ L L jMATEltlAl

Y CAST\NG. ~
!)EE
No,.E
&. AI)OED OIl"l.E"f'JSIC'tJ RS (,-5 ± 1'_4 ON
± 010 ON
ALL FRACTIONAL DIMIlHSIONS
ALL !""RACTIONAL MACHINI[O CHECICED
SEE NO,E
&. WAS ~/'& ~~ lin AL.P DR .... ING NO
CONSI~\!> ±
OlMI[N510N5

"''''''D. B \ IBc cOO",",

SU~Fly..
---~
DESCRIP,ION F IN\SI-\
0" NO. CHANGE BY DATE t
002 ON ALL OI[CIMAL OlMlENSION5
1/2 OIEGREIE ON ANGULAR DIMlEN510N5
, 1" ,
---------

Industry print of a multiview working drawing contains correct views, dimensions, part number, tolerances,
and other specifications for manufacturing.
 DESIGN APPROVAL DATE UNSPECIFIED TOLERANCES PART NO.

D
ThiS Drawing is
.xxx ± .OO5 the property of the
DES.ENG. .xx ± .O15 DUMore Corpora-
.x ± .O50 t ion. It Must not be
MFG.ENG.
Machine Finish v'125 Max reproduced or
D.C. Angles
Concentricity
±1~
.005 TIR
copied without writ-
ten perMiSSion.
DUMORE CORPORATION
SALES Squareness .001 per in. 1300 17TH STREET, RACINE, VI 53403

DO NOT SCALE DRA~ING

REMOVE ALL BURRS
BREAK SHARP CORNERS
TITLE INS ULA TIN G BUSHING
Req. per
Piece RECEIVED AS ~;'GR .G. DATE SCALE
1603-1 Pattern
No. i~D. fv1 S DATEll_ 30 2X
REVISIONS
A NE'w' PART
1/ B W'ASl/ti.002 IA I
C ADDED .12Xl0<>
s:
Q)
o
:::r

B
@ @
::I
CD

(2l .194 ...

~
Q)
..... .191 c..
CD
CD In
o
...
"tI

...s·
~
a~Io
a vl~
r--.r--. CD
r--.r--. ("')("')
Q)
c..
'S s·
ec

.098
.094
L~ .0lD

V .030 X 45·
.090 .635 BOTH ENDS

.725
NOTE :
ALL EDGES TO HAVE R .010 (MAX .)

Fig . 12-38 . Insulating Bushing .

 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

DIRECTIONS - QUIZ QUESTIONS

1. The industrial prints in this section will test your print reading ability.
2. Study the views, dimensions, title block, and notes in Figs. 12-38 through 12-43.
3. Read the quiz questions, refer to the print, and write your answers in the blanks provided.

INSULATING BUSHING QUIZ

1. How deep is the counterbore? 1.

2. How long is the. 7901. 785 diameter? 2.
3. What is the high limit of the total length of the 3.
workpiece?
4. Must the largest outside diameter be concentric to the 4.
counterbore diameter?
5. State the size of the external chamfer. 5.
6. What feature is Datum B? 6.
7. What was revision C? 7.
8. What material is the bushing? 8.
9. What is the low limit of the large outside diameter? 9.
10. How long is the .3741.371 diameter? 10.
11. What is the approximate diameter of the second 1 1.
largest circle shown in the end view?
12. What feature is Datum A? 1 2.
13. How far apart are the two surfaces that must be 1 3.
parallel?
1 4. What is the minimum and maximum distance of @ 1 4.
when the overall length is at the maximum tolerance?

15. What tolerance is allowed on concentricity? 15.

1 6. What finish is required on all surfaces? 1 6.
1 7. If the total length of the bushing is at low limit and 1 7.
the .635 length is at its high limit, what would be the
counterbore depth?
18. What tolerance is allowed on angles? 18.
19. What tolerance is allowed on two place decimals? 19.

20. What scale is the print? 20.

191
 M I LW AUK EEEL EC T RIC TOO Leo R PO R A 11 0 N I DRAWING NO . I':'A;T NO .

1 13135 WEST LISBON ROAD BROOKFIELD . WISCONSIN 53005 2 of 2 j::Sb-66-4/05

#202 WOODRUFF KEYSEAT

@ 1.0010 IAIB

2500
-¢ 2495
~~
A - I
-l r ./50
.140
~
.1
@1.0002
1
@r.OOI IBJ
~~
--"-------+--~-- < l------+--------L...; 1100015
J: ~ t~1 1T n tP.37~7 ~~ ~ s:
t
Q)

1:-- - I UI - U .3764 '{III .301

(")
~
:r
t-_·_-.....
-r CiI2INO '<LL .291 CD

...-f
..... 101.0005 1 ¢ .1875 t , Q)
a.
J~~
CD

l
to
N ¢.3740 SECT\ON A\-A In

¢ .741 A- .3735 ..."'C

S·
.739 (i/2INO .-+
::0
I CD
I~ L£AD--
Q)
- a.
S·
CO

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED G

~r----------------+~--~
FIN ISH SPEC IFI CAT IONS F
~r----------------+~--~
MACHINED SURFACES lo/MA X E
GROUND SURFACES o/MAX . 0
DECIMAL TOL. XX ! .010 .XXX ; 005 XXXX ! 0005 PART NAME INTER. PINION BLANK SCAL E 2x I-c
-+----------------+----l----I
FRACTION TOL. t .010
ANGLE TOL .±. 10- MATERIAL NUMBER DATE B
REMOVEBURRSANDSHARPEDGESTOOl5MAX DESCRIPTION 4140 STEEL DR:::m CMA A REDf<AWN No CHGS
DO NOT SCALE PART NUMSER 56- ~«,- 4105 C HESCyKED JrvB CHANGE ECO DAT E

S I P INC.

Fig . 12-39 . Inter. Pinion Blank .

 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

INTER. PINION BLANK QUIZ

1. How wide is the keyseat? 1.

2. List all the low limit dimensions shown for diameters. 2.
3. Why are length dimensions missing on this print? 3.
4. Why are datums not identified in the feature control 4.
frames for roundness?
5. What dimension gives the location of the keyway? 5.
6. Which diameters are used as datums? 6.
7. What diameter woodruff key is used on this part? 7.
8. Do the views shown represent the actual size of the 8.
workpiece?
9. What other dimensions besides lengths are missing 9.
on this print?
10. What is the approximate depth of the keyseat? 10.
11. Which diameter requiring a roundness specification 1 1.
is more critical in tolerance allowed?
1 2. What type of tolerance is concentricity? 1 2.
13. Which diameter must be concentric to the 13 .
. 3767/.3764 diameter?
14. What tolerance is allowed on the smallest diameter 14.
shown on this print?
15. Which diameter is shown in the sectional view? 15.

16. How many centerlines are shown on this print? 16.

17. What finish is required on ground surfaces? 17.

18. What is the size of the lead diameter? 18.

19. What type of material is used to make the part? 19.

20. What type of section view is Section A-A? 20.

193
 A80903300A FIN'S~-PLATE W'T~
ZINC CHROMATE
5 REMOVE BURI2S •
I~ DRILL ~AI<.P CORN~RS
t- 2 -t

,5 _I
I- 8

t ,,-~ =-====
~DRILLJ~/~ o /1 I
I
o-:. ....L---+-"""t" +-
, I
-i-IOUNC-J IJ 'L -l==~~-=~
i

t ~
II)

®tl
o

~Ir-I~ B-t
':7
5"
(I)

..... I~-h--+_ _
"ltv) ---, ...-t
II)

-= =
Co
to
~ I I I ,r- ---r::. = -=- (I)
fJ)

..."tJ
,I t I I
i ! iL~== --~
...5"
't4-~
IT!
f
__--~d §j :lJ
(I)
II)
Co
5"
~ ~ .442 ,--;---r--------:::--.------r-----=--o
IC

£ .437 1-$-1.002 @ IA 18 @I
DATE
& 1"0. REQ'D.
TOLEDO SCALE /"" MFe'S OF

& f!j
O~,PH'
REUANCE ....c:nt'c
DlV"""" cp COM-"Y
I MACHINE USED ON. _ MACHINERY PlANT

1& ROBOT I TITLE

FflANKSVILU, WISCONSIN 13121 EQUIPMENT

& REFUTOASSY. CLEVIS - LOWER ill

& WAS ~ Rs TOLIERANCES
13 UNLIESS OTHIERWISIE S~IECII'"IIED DRAWN BY --r-.. SCALE MATERIAL
.A
A
WAS 32
RE DI<A~N_
~
~...
±,/UONALLI'"RACTIONALDIMIEHSIONS
CHECKED
NI FULL
DRAWING NO
CRS 1018
I~
± . 010 ON ALL I'"RACTIONAL MACHINIED

ADDE.D"I·~\.llt:"" rrl DIMIENSIONS

± . 002 ON ALL DECIMAL DIMENSIONS A.... ·D.
A80903300A
NO. CHANGE BY DATE ± '/2 DIEGRIEIE ON ANGULAR DIMIENSIONS

Fig . 12-40 . Clevis - Lower.

 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

CLEVIS-LOWER QUIZ

1. How far is the 5/16 drilled hole from the left end of the 1.
workpiece?
2. What material is the workpiece? 2.
3. What does @ mean in the feature control frame? 3.
4. How far can the centerline (plane) of the slot vary to 4.
the centerline of the part?
5. -$- is a locational tolerance symbol that refers to 5.
what part characteristic?
6. Datum feature B must have what relationship to 6.
datum feature A?
7. What is dimension 0 ? 7.
8. How wide is the slot? 8.
9. How deep is the 21/32 hole? 9.
10. What feature is datum B? 10.
11. What size tap drill is used on this print? 11.
12. What was the original width of the slot? 12.
13. How deep is the slot? 13.

14. What is dimension @ ? 14.

15. What finish is required on this part? 15.
16. What machine is used to make this part? 16.
17. What is the high limit on the width of the part? 17.
18. What is dimension @ ? 18.
1 9. Which dimension on the print was originally 1 3/64? 1 9.
20. What thread series is the tapped hole? 20.

195
 ~ ¢ 1.880
1.818
s:
III
(')
~
3"
¢.5005 CD
.5000 ...-t
..... III
Co

~
CD CD
0) rn
o ...3""'C
. 03x45 C~AMF. bS( v
.-+

::D
CD
III
Co
3"
to
.06 )( 45° Cl-\AMF.

01. 003

~
TOLERANCE
Sherwood Media
DEC ANG OWN. BY ISCALE IOAr E

00= ! 01 ! 0° 30" k?~. N.T.S

ooo=! 005
INTER.
pT NO
G-EAR BLANK
FRAC. : ! 1/64
HT TR

~RMS FINISH NONE !M9JZ41L40 ST.

Fig. 12-41. Inter. Cear Blank.
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

INTER. GEAR BLANK QUIZ

1 . What is the maximum thickness dimension allowed 1.

on the workpiece?
2. How many datums are given on the print? 2.

3. What kind of material is used for the workpiece? 3.

4. What finish is required on the ends of the gear blank? 4.

5. What limits of flatness are given for the workpiece? 5.

6. How concentric must the outside diameter be? 6.

7. What feature is Datum A? 7.
8. How many surfaces are given a tolerance for flatness? 8.
9. What does the symbol - mean? 9.
10. What does the abbreviation N.T.S. mean? 10.

11 . Determine the tolerance allowed on the hole of the 1 1.

workpiece.
12. What does the symbol ...l. mean? 12.
13. Is this part heat treated? 13.
14. What size internal chamfer is required for the workpiece? 14.
15. Give an example of a feature control frame shown on 15.
this print.
 IINSPFr.IFIFO TOLERANCES

., PART NO .

599-03&9

~~~_~~'_/~ _A,LL BURRS

BREAK SHARP CORNERS HOUSING

REVISIONS
AIADDED .fIl?L/.:3/-1
, rIN/!JI-I NOn:
B I WAS 1./815
/0-32 UNF -28 +.06
1./t!JIO
2~OLES 1- .1 .51~oo
s:
III
o
::r
:i.
CD

...-I
.... III

11// /ll~ '\\\\ ~

Q.
to CD
C/)
00
~ ..."'tI
:i.
....
~,@

~r-i-
I~ tt
fR
~
C\j
\\
~!Q
,,"
~ "
:lJ
CD
III
Q.
:i.
to

SECTION A-A
USE:

Fig. 12-42. Housing.

 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

HOUSING QUIZ

1 . How many tapped holes are in the part? 1.

2. What dimensions are used in the location of the 2.

tapped holes?
3. What size is the bearing bore in the housing? 3.

4. What type of view is to the right on the drawing? 4.

5. What is the maximum depth allowed for the 10-32 5.

UNF thread?
6. What is the minimum depth allowed for the 10-32 6.
UNF thread?
7. How much tolerance is permitted on the bearing bore? 7.
8. What kind of feature is Datum A? 8.
9. What does the symbol ;' represent? 9.
10. Is the outside of the housing finished? If yes, to what 10.
finish?
11 . What was revision B? 11 .
12. How much runout is permitted between the bore and 12.
the outside diameter?
13. How many ribs does this part possess? 13.

14. How far apart are the tapped holes? 14.

15. How is the housing finished? 15.

199
 A81514700A 16. +0
1
-64-

.3
16

*7~20~ DRILL
1 U¢5_
16 r 3
8
¢2.500 I
4 -20UNC..,.2B
2.498
s:
III
n
::::r
::::J
CD

...-I
III
N c..
o CD
en
o
"C

~
-
::::!.
::::J

::tJ
CD
III
47 DRILL c..
5'
64 <C

DATE
&. NO. REQ'O. /
TOLEDO SCALE ~ MFC;'S OF
Ifj
&. MACHINE USED ON.
REUANCE ...
<>IVI.ION ' " CTffIIC COM_NY
MtAPPlNG MACHINERY Pl.AHT ~p"'
FRANKSVILLE. WISCONSIN 53128 EQUIPMENT
A III!FER TO ASSY.
TITLE

& COUNTERWEIGHT-MAIN
& TOLERANCIES
UNLIESS OTHIERWISIE SPECIFIED
FULL
A ± 1/6. ON
± .010 ON
ALL FRACTIONAL DIMIENSIOHS
ALL FRACTIONAL MACHINED
DRAWN I I Y - M

CHECKED
SCALE

DRAWING NO
MATERIALCRS_IOI8

A WAS 10/.3 DIMENSIONS

NO. CHANGE BY DATE

± .002 ON
±I
ALL DECIMAL DIMENSIONS
2 DEGREE ON ANGULAR DIMENSIONS
APP'O. A815J4700A
Fig. 12-43. Counterweight--Main.
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing

COUNTERWEIGHT - MAIN QUIZ

1. What size is the counterbore diameter? 1.

2. What is the minimum thickness allowed on the 2.
counterweight?
3. What tolerance is allowed on the outside diameter of 3.
the part?
4. How many datums are shown on the print? 4.
5. What does the symbol w mean? 5.
6. What does UNC mean? 6.
7. How thick was the part originally? 7.
8. What tolerance IS allowed on the counterbore 8.
diameter?
9. How deep is the counterbore? 9.
10. Approximately how long is the tapped hole? 10.
1 1. What does the B mean in the thread designation? 11 .
1 2. How much wall thickness is there between the 1 2.
counterbore and the sides of the counterweight?
1 3. What type of fractional tolerance is shown on the 1 3.
print?
14. What type of material is 1018? 14.
15. Is a #8 drill larger or smaller than a #7 drill? 15.

201
 + [ R88877 IRE401. I. I
REVISION DECISION
SYM DATE APPROVED

87732RE I09APR
86602RE 121 OCT

eO I BASIC PLANE
44±0.25
lD
OJ ..\8:-5 0

0"q-t
3 03
o
+1
I") 37
o
lD
-r---=r====,r===fl-- r - o
,--

...
OJ
o
!
IL-JI "-\Jl{r-ur=-==~
~--~ -----~---- '<!/
.l1~ V: 1+
~
'----

STEPS PERMISSIBLE
3 03 r 42
N
o 7.7 10.3±0.25 04 J 3 I ±3
N STEPS PERMISSIBLE
13.3±0.25 53±0.25
HEAT TREATMENT
HT20T
0.64±0. 13 ANNEALED CASE I-
0.25 MIN CASE AFTER ~
FINISH MACHINING m
m
MATL
~~~~~2:~ OWN SAeJ-371 14 DEERE &, COMPANY ::j
2. CLEANLINESS PER JDS-GI69 15.88 RND ~L~~~OH'. CH' • MOLINE ILLINOIS 61265 1--1
JDM XI2LI5 STEEL ~'I..:ES
LA~ •

CLASS 6.2 ENTIRE PART " ... S. BRANDAU NA>£ JJ

0.003m2 -JDS-G25 GENERAL
TOLERANCES CHI( .
VAL VE ,
SHUTTLE rn
.po.
I. FREE FROM BURRS -JDS-G" 3 DRAFTING (R88877E) ~
CORNER BREAK 0.5 MAX REF, "'vo 85~L lDESIRETROL s8'1 FSa"" IPAA'R'8'8877 IRE:tO 1-: ~
REF, I~ ~ _ 2: I J METRIC 1 ~ 1!>£E'.
...
c/c ALE II

CAD prints can be distinguished from manually drawn prints by their consistency in presentation. Note how letters and numbers
are easily read.

'.
 J
I t
-,
Unit
' PRIN'~ READING
. REiVIEW
-'

'<. t • I

\.
I •

,..

This final unit of Machine Trades Print Reading contains a series of

quizzes. These quizzes review the topics covered throughout the text.
These topics include line usage , multiview drawings , detailing of fea-
tures, and tolerances.
When completing these quizzes, use the following procedure:
1. Begin by studying the drawing . Imagine that you are making the part
that is shown in the print. Try to visualize the piece by asking your-
self these questions:
• What type of material is used? What color will the finished prod-
uct be? Will the edges be smooth or rough?
• How large is the piece? Could you easily hold it in one hand , or
would several people be needed to lift it?
• Which machining processes are used to create the piece? Do
holes require reaming or tapping? Which surfaces need to be
machined?
• For whom is the piece being manufactured? Why do they need
this piece?
• Are there any unusual notes or tolerances that will require addi-
tional work or time?
2. Once you have visualized the piece, answer the quiz questions.
3. After completing the questions , recheck your answers. Use common
sense to make sure that your answers are reasonable.
There is a significant difference between simply reading numbers from
a print and understanding what those numbers mean. By learning to
visualize what is being made and knowing the steps required to make it,
you will gain a better understanding of the views, dimensions , tolerances ,
and symbols discussed in this text.

203
 4X 5/16-24 UNF-2B X 45'

I-$I~ .01@jAjB@]
EQUALLY SPACED .37
II> 33
T
11>2.062 Ai ~---'.... "- ® R.06 MAX
1/1.021 AI / ./
\ .06 X 45'
. r I I
r I
2 PLS.

T~
----1.----r-
2.66
II> 2.60 '" 1.46
.... 1.36
SCALE: 2X s:
III
o
t :::r
1/1·015IAI ::I
CD

...-I
I\J
o 0/ I
III
c..
CD
C/)

% I
.j:>.
11>.7445 ~
.7435 A~ ...:;'
A ::0
CD
III
c..
:;'
CC
1 UNLESS SPECIFIED:
. [01.061 ALL OVER SECTION A- A nn..
U1IUS8 ~C17lZDI NRJ'S JnJrr . . , . . ", ALl. IIIUJ1P 6D12S, .umt8, n..t8II
" D8CIMALS ± 006
'1UCf70NS ±
AND CUAJI. pur NO. ,." IU 8'f'aL II'f'AJlP6» r1J'II 1/1' ,.,
~/B4 ~~Ta::c:::scr!tlift:::::;, -=s:'=~::-.
ARCUS ± Z IInt:l7mD.

2. PART SHOULD BE FREE FROM Iff:.IU

'
ALL SHARP EDGES & BURRS. FULL'

Pmr--NO.
A ADDED R.06 MAX 5/1 B-115C56-A

Fig. 13-1. Hub-Water Pump Pulley.

 Print Reading Review

HUB-WATER PUMP PULLEY QUIZ

1. What is the maximum outside diameter of the pulley. 1.

2. What is the maximum length of the .744 diameter 2.
bore?
3. How long is the tapered section of the pulley? 3.
Calculate using high limit dimensions.
4. What fit are the threaded holes? 4.
5. What bolt circle is used for the threaded holes? 5.
6. How many chamfers does the part have? 6.
7. How much does the taper differ in diameter? 7.
8. What is the minimum thickness of the part? 8.
9. What is the maximum chamfer allowed on the 9.
threaded holes?
10. What does the symbol Q signify? 10.
11. What is the minimum runout shown on the print? 11.
1 2. What is the high limit on the depth of the shallow 1 2.
counterbore?
13. How many revisions have been made on the part? 13.
14. What feature is datum A? 14.
1 5. What type of sectional view is shown? 1 5.

205
 NOTE: MAT'l: ALUM. EXTRUSION 6063 - T6

A 3.260 - I

3 .000 _I
2 .998
¢2.600 .078
// ¢ 1.750 6~

~
TYP . .586

. 120 ~
TYP. ,
. ¢.468
~
Q)
998 n
¢ '. 996 =r
5'
CD
, IUI.oC53fAl -f
354 Ql
I\) 4X ¢ ·. 334 a.
o CD
C'I 1"$"1¢.01O @I A(fJ)1 VI
"'C
~.

SECTI ON A - A
...
::::I

:JJ
CD
Q)
a.
::::I
to

TOLERANCES
1~---------111 C AD KENOSHA. WI.
~.AN'I.A

R.015
DECIMALS ± .005 DRAWING SPECUUJSTS
FRACTIONS ± 1/64 FAN HOUSING SPACER
2X ANGLE ± 2'
M8
PURCHASED EXTRUSION FORM ERICKSON,INC . DRAlI'N BY:

SCAIZ: FUll IIDA.TE: 8-5 I 8-1211-2A

Fig. 13-2. Fan Housing Spacer.

 Print Reading Review

FAN HOUSING SPACER QUIZ

1. What is the minimum overall length of the spacer? 1.

2. What is the minimum depth allowed on the counter- 2.
bored hole?
3. What is the largest diameter on the spacer? 3.
4. What size is the feature referred to as datum A? 4.
5. What is the thinnest wall thickness on the spacer? 5.
6. What is the maximum length of the 2.6 diameter 6.
section?
7. What is the maximum length for the .982/.979 7.
diameter?
8. What tolerance is given for total runout? 8.
9. What positional tolerance is specified for the .334 9.
holes?
1 O. What tolerance is specified for circular runout? 1 O.
1 1. What is the width of the 4 slots in the housing 11 .
spacer?
12. What size is the chamfer on the .982/.979 diameter? 12.
13. What material is used to manufacture the spacer? 13.
14. Determine distance
limit.
0 when holes are at the low 14.

15. Determine distance

limit.
® when holes are at the high 15.

II

207
 1.656 -' 2 x ¢ .1552
.1542
/$EMi5®JA]

¢1.062 2X ¢.1875 V X 60'

STOCK REF.

A
32

t
-·-,1
\I' '.." I'" I "'"I" '" L
S
III
¢,465 n
:T
::::l
CD
-t
.5905 ¢.3125 Ql
0-
N
o .5900 CD
00 3/8-24 UNF-3A .015x45° CHAM.
rJJ
-0
I© I ¢.002 IA I ..
::!.
::::l

:::0
CD
III
0-
::::l
to

NOTE. I
TOLERANCES CAD ]MANIA
KENOSHA, WI.
UNDERCUT THREAD SHOULDER TO ROOT DIAMETER DECIMALS ± .005 DRAWING SPECIAlJSTS
FRACTIONS ± 1/64
ANGLE ± 2·
SPINDLE DRIVE
,DRA.1rN BY: ASHLEY T.
~ 2X IIDATE: 6-28 B-2246C

Fig. 13-3. Spindle Drive.

 Print Reading Review

SPINDLE DRIVE QUIZ

1. What size is the large internal chamfer? 1.

2. What is the length of the .590 diameter? 2.
3. How deep is the .3125 diameter hole? 3.
4. Which dimension requires the best machined surface? 4.
5. What is the maximum length of the head position of 5.
the spindle drive?
6. The 60° shoulder relief should be machined to what 6.
diameter?
7. What feature is datum A? 7.
8. List the dimension/dimensions referred to as basic 8.
size?
9. What diameter are the chamfers on the. 1 55 holes? 9.
10. What does the symbol ~ mean? 10.
11. How wide is the 60° groove at the opening? 11 .
1 2. What tolerance is given for concentricity of the 1 2.
thread?
13. What size must the two .1 552/.1 542 holes be to 13.
constitute maximum material condition?
14. What is the smallest tolerance shown on the print? 14.
1 5. What is the minimum allowable wall thickness between 1 5.
the .3125 and .155 holes if they are at the low limit?

209
 r FORGED LENGTH
r
I
.. 21
R . 21
I
, /
FORM RADII TO FIT TOTAL LENGTH
~ OF 4.79 TO 4.75
1. 10 ~ fl\7 C\1
~
o C'J
o
C\1
0.

Ll
R.56 .750
~ .740 PUNCH
~

C'J

N
.
2B1
l
I i
r ~.937
~ A
1.
937
lr I
.2B1 J .781
L427
.437
PUNCH
s:
III
C'l
::r
::J
(I)

-I
Ql
c.
(I)
.....
_U 1.186 I
I • IJ)
0
n SECTION A-A ."
::!.

I J
....
::J

jJ
1-- --I
r-- --c
J I
(I)
III
C.
S·
(C

LD R.38 I
f-.
TOLERANCES I CAD JV[A~IA
KENOSHA, WI.
C\1
t:D DECIMALS ± .005 DRAWING SPECIALISTS

R.06 ~ 0- A iFRACTIONS ± 1/64 FORGED BODYSHOP

(TYP) ANGLE ± 2" 11-.. HAMMER
MAT'L-4063 01.25
[ IFAWN BY: AAR 0 N
SCALE: f= 1 I DATE: 9 /6 I B-3359F

Fig. 13-4. Forged Bodyshop Hammer.

 Print Reading Review

FORGED BODYSHOP HAMMER QUIZ

1 . What diameter are the hammer head ends? 1.

2. What diameters are the necks? 2.

3. How high is the middle portion of the hammer? 3.

4. What is the width of the handle slot? 4.

5. What is the maximum length of the handle slot? 5.
6. Referring to the top view, determine the sidewall 6.
thickness of the handle slot.
7. What material is used for the forging? 7.
8. What is the minimum total length of the hammer? 8.
9. Using print dimensions, what would be the distance 9.
from the center of the slot to the hammer faces?
10. What size are the smallest radii on the forging? 10.

II

211
 .078/.074

R.118
.156 ,,/" "
""" R.005(TYP .)
/"
// DETAIL 3X
/
/
/ ...------ /"
/
/
/'
(9
I

f/J2.205
IL
f/J.875
~.70B
I I
I I
-,JJ-+
¢
1- - - t - - -
.624
.621
(
\

\ S
III

_
~ _ 1 , 1 ...
C"l
::T
3'
Y CD

N
-"
R.07 -;l ¢ .495
.492
...
-I
III
Q.
CD
en
N
~

/ -
I
3'
jJ
CD

3 X ¢.275 ~
III
Q.
::::l
7/8-18 UNF co
i$i¢.010 @ iAi
11/32 LG. TOLERANCES CAD lY.(AN" I A
KENOSHA, WI.
DECIMALS ± .005 DRAWING SPECIALISTS
FRACTIONS ± 1/64
MATERIAL: ANGLE ± 2' ENDCAP
ALUMN. 6061-T6 DRAlIN BY: CAROL 1.
SCALE: 2X DATE: 5-1 B-1357EC

Fig. 13-5. Endcap.

 Print Reading Review

ENDCAP QUIZ

1 . How far apart, in degrees, are the three. 275 diameter 1.

holes from each other?
2. What is the low limit of the large hole? 2.

3. What is the maximum diameter of the internal groove? 3.

4. What is the maximum length of the endcap? 4.

5. How long is the 1 .255/1 .251 diameter section? 5.

6. What is the high limit on the largest diameter? 6.

7. What is the wall thickness between the .275 diameter 7.
holes and the large outside diameter?
8. What is the minimum width of the slot? 8.
9. What feature is datum A? 9.
10. What does the geometric symbol -$ mean? 10.

1 1 . With the bore at high limit and the slot diameter at 1 1.

low limit, how deep is the slot?
12. What dimension locates the internal groove? 12.

13. How thick is the flange on the endcap? 13.

14. What is the concentricity tolerance? 14.

213
 5.376

2.87
1_+ 1.00
~

~
I

R.06 R.09 \ R.50 j

7.250

t 2.87
~I
/' /
\'rr
D;:~
!
~
Q)
(')
~
5'
(t)
R 1.38
/ /'/'/'
...-I
Q)

I)I c..
'" '( /' /'
J\)
.....
~ rn~ --1'- - -:'++-- ---~( \
'-- ../
)
DETAIL 3X (t)
en

...~
::J
.146
I I :lJ
(t)
¢.500 Q)
c..
::J
to

TOLERANCES II CAD J\..1::A.N'"IA.

KENOSHA, WI.
DECIMALS ± .005 DRAWING SPECIALISTS
2-PL. ± .010 FORGED
3-PL. ± .005 SPLITTING CHISEL
ANGLE ± 2' DRAWN BY: ANDY B.

SCAL!: 1 = 1II DATE: 7-1 8 I B-2289FC

Fig. 13-6. Forged Splitting Chisel.

 Print Reading Review

FORGED SPLITTING CHISEL QUIZ

1 . What is the scale of the print? 1.

2. What is the maximum length allowed for the chisel? 2.

3. What is the shank diameter? 3.

4. What is the shank length? 4.

5. What is the total included angle of the chisel point? 5.

6. What geometric symbol is shown in the front view? 6.

7. What type of tolerance is this geometric symbol? 7.
8. What geometric symbol is shown in the top view? 8.
9. What is the symbol I called? 9.
10. What is the diameter on the chisel? 10.

1 1 . What is the high limit on the width of the chisel blade? 1 1.

12. What is the maximum thickness allowed on the chisel 12.

blade?
13. What size is the largest fillet shown on the print? 13.
14. What is the smallest tolerance shown on the print? 14.
15. What is the print drawing number? 15.

215
 6055 1 CNC 200
® JOB N0·1 MACH NO . ISTEP NO.
1 - - - - - .520

®
. 131 ± .002
AUTO PR I NT o
•
. 005 R
.003
.042+,000
CNC PRINT
. 015 R FINISHING DEPT PRINT o
MASTER PRI NT
•

0.509±.0005 . 389 0356:.886

010 R " " ~O"

0298 +.000

'r ~
II)
n
~
:::J
(I)

~
II)

~
Q,
I\)
..... (I)
Ul
0')
EDGES SHARP ® "'tJ
.250±.001

-
® 1 0.345 +.000 ~.
:::J
t - -- - - .440 . - .00 1
.435 : II
(I)
® I REVISED PER CUST. REV F JL II)
1 - - - - - - .782±.002 B
6/15/ Q,
:::J
A REVISED & REDRAWN VS (Q
1/29/
MATERIAL REV DESCRI PTI ON DAT E

MFG.
303 SS
DRAIiING APPROVAL

SBO
CUSTOMER
rn ~~~~~RINa
I UNLESS OTHER\l1 SE SPEC I FI Ed
RE MOVE ALL SHARP CORNERS
ENG. 4/1 8
END LIGHTS CO.
CUSTOMER PART NO.
AND BURRS .00 5 MAX R
OR CHAMFER. - -
SU RFACE FI NI SH ~
QUAL! TY
CONTROL @ I"
02 Dvr
153774
CUST . REV.
F
TOLERANCES DRA WN PART NAME
VIN CEj ./ "
ADAPTER
1 . XX +/- .01 5 BY

THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF CAD DRAWING . XXX + /- .005 SCALE JOB NUMBER
DCBBY ENGINEERING AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED . COPIED
OR USED FOR MANUFACTURE OR SALE WITHOUT WRITIEN APPROVAL.
NO IlANUAL
CHANGES PERllmED ANGLES + / - 1/ 2" 4 1 CAD REF . 60 55-200 60 55
Fig . 13-7. Adapter.
 Print Reading Review

ADAPTER QUIZ

1. Identify the customer part number. 1.

2. What is the minimum total length of the workpiece? 2.
3. What is the maximum diameter of the external 3.
groove?
4. What is the minimum width allowed on the external 4.
groove?
5. What is the low limit on the .375 diameter? 5.
6. Identify the scale of the print. 6.
7. What is the minimum length of the .509 diameter? 7.
8. What is the largest outside diameter? 8.
9. What is the low limit on the large internal diameter? 9.
10. How many revisions were made on 6-15? 10.
11. What dimension is used to locate the external 11.
groove?
12. Which dimension on the print has the least tolerance? 12.
13. What surface finish is required? 13.
14. How many edges are required to remain sharp? 14.
15. How many corners require a .015 radius? 15.
16. If the overall length is at maximum size and the small 16.
internal bore is at its maximum length, what would be
the length of the large internal bore?
17. With the .549 diameter at its high limit and the exter- 17.
nal groove diameter at its low limit determine the
depth of the groove.
18. What type of view is shown on the print? 18.
19. What specified dimension has the largest tolerance? 19.
20. With the .509 diameter at its maximum length, what 20.
is the length of the .549 diameter if the .520 dimen-
sion is held?

217
 33 8 71 CNC 2 00
~ __________ .879 __________~ JOB N0 . 1 MACH No . 1STEP NO.
.875

w I j ro:"t385_~ AUTO PRINT 0

I c=c , ~ "<O r I~{\~y1____+-__~

CNC PRINT
FINISHING DEPT PRINT
MASTER PRINT
•
0
•

II
gI.410 \ I

I .':: '- ~
THREAD -
RELIEF 3:
f-- III
(")
~
~
t1I
~
~~y III
Co
N
~ 3L~ t1I
III
co ~-..:. . .... ,
.066
.064
~

-
::::!.
'- ~SLOT ~

: II
t1I

t III
Co
~

p (Q

MATERIAL

rn r~~f~RINa
REV DESCRIPTION I DATE

303 SST
3/8-24 UNF-2A THREADS DRAWING APPROVAL
MAJOR DIA .3739/.3667
PITCH DIA .3468/.3430 MFG . CUSTOMER
ENG. ISBn 10!13
MINOR DIA .3228 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
EN D LIGHTS CO.
REMOVE ALL SHARP CORNERS
AND BURRS .005 MAX R QUALIlY CUSTOMER PART NO. TCUST. REV.
OR CHAMFER. - - -
CONTROL I TJW 10!.3 15203 A
SURFACE FINISH ~
TOLERANCES DRAWN PART NAME
.xx +1- ~ BY I JL 10!13
S OCKET, "p" BAYONET
CAD DRAWING .xxx +1- ~ SCALE JOB NUMBER
THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERlY OF
DOBBY ENGINEERING AND SHAlL NOT BE REPRODUCED, COPIED OR
USED FOR MANUFACTURE OR SALE WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL
NO IlANUAL
CHANGES PERlIlTI'ED ANGLES +I-~ 3 :1 CAD REF. 3387-200 3387
Fig. 13-8. Socket, " P" Bayonet.
 Print Reading Review

SOCKET, "P" BAYONET QUIZ

1. What is the minimum overall length of the workpiece? 1.

2. How long is the section that has a .270 diameter? 2.

3. What size is the angular shoulder shown in the top 3.

view?
4. What length are the 45° chamfers? 4.

5. What is the thread diameter? 5.

6. If the major diameter of the thread is at the high limit 6.

what is the depth of the thread?
7. How wide is the slot? 7.

8. How long is the short leg of the slot? 8.

9. What is the high limit on the section with the .410 9.

diameter?
10. What operation or step number is this part? 10.

11. What is the length of the thread? 11.

12. How many degrees does the slot revolve? 12.
13. If the thread relief diameter were at high limit would 13.
the relief interfere with the minor diameter?
14. Does the slot go through the wall of the hole and out- 14.
side diameter?
15. How far is the end of the slot from the right end of the 15.
workpiece?
16. How far is the short end of the slot from the left end 16.
of the workpiece?
17. What is the CAD reference number? 17.
18. What does SST mean? 18.
19. Could the .385 length be at high limit if both the .180 19.
and .312 lengths were at high limit?
20. What is the maximum chamfer allowed on unspeci- 20.
fied corners?

219
 OPERATION 20 5243-0002
N NOTES
o ©
o 1. BREAK ALL SHARP CORNERS.
o
i!i I
OJ ,."
.65 2 MAXIMUM OF .010 STEP
~ '<t (SEE NOTE 2) ALLOWED ON SURFACE
z N
I~
~
If)
f © ®
AFFECTED BY THESE DIMENSIONS.
3 . 0.516 HOLE CAN BE LOCATED
---------1------ ANYWHERE WITHIN ± 10' RANGE

¢516 ~
1
1.20
AS INDICATED.

REF.
DRILL
DO NOT
BREAK THRU
TO THREAD
\ " .090 x 45' .045 X 45'
\ CHAMFER CHAMFER ®
---j .748
-1 ©
i
1105+. 015
- 000 , 500
~
r- ::
CII
n
::I"
::s
t R
CD

J_~o'
®-'--
___-_
.980 ::;I
CII
a.
I\)
I\)
o
1-6::=,-__- (SEE NOTE 2) (SEE NOTE 2)
CD
1/1
"tJ

-
~.
V sEE NOTE 3) R ::s
JJ
CD
5/8-18 UNF-2B CII
.155 .155 a.
THRU ::s
CSK ¢.75 (C

I .. 2.40 .. I 120' CSK f/J . 75

A & E Manufacturing Company

-
5~1 21ST Street PO
-- ...-- ----- - - .. .
BOll 1616 RaCIne, WI. 53401-1616

ij$TOIolER LA'Y'£R
002
~CR 94 102J~~~I:;1: l" O-:~-l 08~ J MED I 8-2 [ TWt,~~~, . I. or~TS 11:1
ITT
©
., 1 11~'
x:t'o 1 _~
2 '" 2

Fig . 13-9. Power Steering Pulley Remover Body.

 Print Reading Review

POWER STEERING PULLEY REMOVER BODY QUIZ

1. What is the maximum overall length of the workpiece? 1.

2. What is the length of the 1.355 internal dimension? 2.
3. What is the length of the thread? 3.
4. What size is the external chamfer on the left end of 4.
the part?
5. What fit class is the thread? 5.
6. What is the minimum size of the large internal circu- 6.
lar groove?
7. What size chamfer is on the thread? 7.
8. What is the maximum size of the .155 deep slot on 8.
the left end of the workpiece?
9. What size is the reference drill? 9.
10. What is the minimum outside diameter of the 10.
workpiece?
11. What type of sectional view is shown in the upper-left 11.
portion of the print?
12. When was revision E made? 12.
13. What material is used to machine the workpiece? 13.
14. If the 1.495 wide circular groove is at maximum size and 14.
the outside diameter is at minimum size, what would be
the distance from the groove to the outer surface?
15. What dimension does the hidden line in the right end 15.
view represent?
16. Within what total range can the .516 diameter hole 16.
be located?
17. What is the part number of the workpiece? 17.
18. How many places call for a .03 radius? 18.
19. When was the print first released? 19.
20. Referring to the upper-left view of the print, what is the 20.
length of the protrusion from the right end to the lower
shoulder (disregarding the fillet)?
 6534 1 AUTO 200
JOB N0.1 MACH No · 1STEP NO.

I• 1.575 - - - - - - - - - - --1
1.572

0.450
1--- - - - .812 MIN . •I
AUTO PRINT
CNC PRINT
FINISHING DEPT PRINT
•oo
•
1--- - .480 - ----j
.020 R MASTER PRINT

0.5.36 0.445 0.4.30 0.458 0.475

.5.34 .44.3 .428 .455 .47.3

~
III
n
~
:l
CD
.005 X
.00.3 ~
III
C.
N CD
N VI
N 'lJ

-
1---- - - - - - - - 1.228 ------------1 ~.
:l

JJ
CD
III
C.
:l
co
MATERIAL REV DESCRIPTION DATE
CRS llLl? ~ DOBBY
DRAWING APPROVAL ~ ~NuIN~~RINu
MFG. CUSTOMER
ENG . I SED 1 7/ 20
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
BEST HYDRAULICS
REMOVE ALL SHARP CORNERS
AND BURRS .00 5 MAX R OUALIlY CUSTOMER PART NO. CUST. REV.
OR CHAMFER . - - -
CONTROL I T JW 17/20 37856-0189 A
SURFACE fiNISH ~
TOLERANCES DRAWN PART NAME
JL 17/20
XX +/- ~ BY PISTON
CAD DRAWI NG .XXX +/- .003 SCALE JOB NUMBER
653 4
THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERlY OF
DOBBY ENGINEERING AND SHAlL NOT BE REPRODUCED. COPIED OR
USED FOR MANUFACTURE OR SALE WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAl.
NO IlANUAL
CHANGES PERlimED ANGLES +/- 1/2 0

3 :1 CAD REF. 6534 - 200

Fig. 13-10. Piston .

 Print Reading Review

PISTON QUIZ

1. What is the smallest outside diameter? 1.

2. What is the maximum overall length allowed for the 2.

workpiece?
3. What diameter is the .040 wide groove? 3.

4. How deep is the .1572 diameter hole? 4.

5. What radius is given on the print? 5.

6. What scale is the print? 6.
7. What tolerance is used on the .450 diameter? 7.
8. To what size is the 30° internal chamfer machined? 8.
9. How deep is the .344 diameter hole? 9.
10. What specific type of material is used to make the 10.
workpiece?
11. What finish is required on unspecified surfaces? 11.
12. What dimension specifies the width of the .360 diam- 12.
eter external groove?
13. What is the distance from the left end of the work- 13.
piece to the shoulder formed between the .536 and
.450 diameters?
14. By whom was the print drawn? 14.
15. What is the depth of the .155 wide groove if both 15.
diameters involved were at the high limit?
16. What is the tolerance for two place decimals? 16.
17. How many 45° chamfers are on the workpiece? 17.
18. What is the tolerance shown on the print? 18.
19. What dimension positions the .360 diameter groove? 19.
20. What wall thickness exists if the large diameter hole 20.
and the outside diameter are at low limits?

223
 51BB 200
.JOB NO. STEP NO.

~~6 - '6 UN - 2A
______ P.TCHR ::,~~'/.802
".NOR • .13:! 7655
NO GO GAGE TO GO ON '/2 TURN MAX .
AUTO PRINT 0
.100 CNC PRINT •
FINISHING DEPT PRINT 0
MASTER PRINT • '
625/615

/ .1 I
''" • .,,7 / .873

1
~.620/ .610 [ ~ . 72 S~HAR~P;;=;::=====---
NO C~ORNER
FER ALLOWED
.5' CHAMFER TO ' .720

s:
II)
(")
~
LENGTH OVER :::l
GAGE BALL (1)
. 119/. 111
~
II)
Q.
N (1)
N UI

"'" ""tJ
.528 ~
-
~.
:::l

:c
(1)
II)
Q.
:::l
HOLD FOR 3/16" REV'SED AND REDRAWN ... co
THEN ~ . 50 '/8
MATERIAL REV I DESCRIPTION I DATE
DRAWING APPROVAL
MFG.
IDr: Ir~~t::R'Na
CUSTOMER
f - - - (.91 REF) UNL£SS OTHERwrSE SP[CIF1ED
REWOVE All SHARP CORNERS
ENG. ISBD 1'1" ORICAP, INC.
NolO BURRS .005 WAX R OUAUTY CUSTOMER PART NO. CUST. REV.
OR CHAMF'EA. - - TJ" ,'1" C06B40B G
~
CONTROL
SURfACE FlNISH
TOlERANCES DRAWN PART NAME
SBD 1'1"
.xx +/- ~ BY ORIFICE
THESE DRA'MI+CS .¥to SP[OflCATJOHS AM. THE PfK)P£RTyrs CAD DRAlnNC .xxx +/- ~ SCALE JOB NUMBER
D098Y EHCINEIRINC NolO SI-WJ. NOT 8£ REPAOOUCED, OOPI£[) OR
USED f"OR ~UFACTURE OR SAl.E WJTHOUT WRlntH 1>Pf'ftCN/IL
NO 1WfU.u.
C1IANca PlaKITTI:D
NotCl.£S +/ ___
,"__ NTS CtD REF. 618&-200 5188

Fig. 13-11. Orifice.

 Print Reading Review

ORIFICE QUIZ

1. When was the print approved by quality control? 1.

2. What is the maximum overall length allowed on the 2.
part?
3. What is the maximum overall diameter of the 3.
workpiece?
4. What is the low limit on the size of the finished hex? 4.
5. What is the length of the .877/.873 diameter? 5.
6. What is the minimum allowed diameter of the .044 6.
wide internal groove?
7. What is the low limit on the thread relief diameter? 7.
8. What is the length of the thread, including chamfers? 8.
9. What is the maximum major diameter of the thread? 9.
10. Is this part produced on a CNC machine? 10.
11. How wide is the .620 diameter groove? 11.
12. What is the length of the hex portion of the orifice? 12.
13. When was the print last revised? 13.
14. What is the maximum radius allowed on the part? 14.
15. How far is the narrow internal groove from the right 15.
end of the part if the width of the slot is at its high
limit?
16. How long is the .315/.311 diameter? 16.
17. What is the length of the internal 45° chamfer? 17.
18. What is the large diameter of the short 30° angle at the 18.
tip of the orifice?
19. What is the length of the .502 internal diameter? 19.
20. What is the length of the .56 diameter, including the 20.
45° chamfers?

225
 R·EFERENCE
- - SECTION
r '

NATIONAL COARSE AND NATIONAL FINE THREADS AND TAP DRILLS

THREADS TAP DRILL

PER MAJOR MINOR PITCH 75 PERCENT DECIMAL CLEARANCE DECIMAL
SIZE INCH DIA. DIA. DIA. THREAD EQUIVALENT DRILL EQUIVALENT
2 56 .0860 .0628 .0744 50 .0700 42 .0935
64 .0860 .0657 .0759 50 .0700 42 .0935
3 48 .099 .0719 .0855 47 .0785 36 .1065
56 .099 .0758 .0874 45 .0820 36 .1065
4 40 .112 .0795 .0958 43 .0890 31 . 1200
48 .112 .0849 .0985 42 .0935 31 .1200
6 32 . 138 .0974 .1177 36 . 1065 26 .1470
40 .138 .1055 .1218 33 .1130 26 . 1470
8 32 .164 . 1234 . 1437 29 . 1360 17 .1730
36 . 164 .1279 . 1460 29 .1360 17 .1730
10 24 . 190 .1359 .1629 25 .1495 8 .1990
32 .190 . 1494 . 1697 21 .1590 8 .1990
12 24 . 216 . 1619 . 1889 16 .1770 1 .2280
28 . 216 . 1696 .1928 14 .1820 2 .2210
1/ 4 20 .250 . 1850 .2175 7 .2010 G .2610
28 .250 .2036 .2268 3 .2130 G .2610
5/ 16 18 .3125 .2403 .2764 F .2570 21 / 64 .3281
24 .3125 .2584 . 2854 I .2720 21 / 64 .3281
3/ 8 16 .3750 .2938 .3344 5/ 16 .3125 25/ 64 .3906
24 .3750 .3209 .3479 Q .3320 25/ 64 .3906
7/ 16 14 .4375 .3447 .3911 U .3680 15/ 32 .4687
20 .4375 .3725 .4050 25/ 64 .3906 29/ 64 .4531
1/2 13 .5000 .4001 .4500 27/ 64 .4219 17/ 32 .5312
20 .5000 .4350 .4675 29 / 64 .4531 33/ 64 .5156
9/ 16 12 .5625 .4542 .5084 31 / 64 .4844 19/ 32 .5937
18 .5625 .4903 .5264 33/ 64 .5156 37/ 64 .5781
5/ 8 11 .6250 .5069 .5660 17/ 32 .5312 21 / 32 .6562
18 .6250 .5528 .5889 37/ 64 .5781 4 1164 .6406
3/ 4 10 .7500 .6201 .6850 21 / 32 .6562 25/ 32 .7812
16 .7500 .6688 .7094 11 / 16 .6875 49 / 64 .7656
7/ 8 9 .8750 .7307 .8028 49 / 64 .7656 29 / 32 .9062
14 .8750 .7822 .8286 13/ 16 .8125 57/ 64 .8906
1 8 1.0000 .8376 .9188 7/ 8 .8750 1-1 / 32 1.0312
14 1.0000 .9072 .9536 15/ 16 .9375 1-1 / 64 1.0156
1-1 / 8 7 1. 1250 .9394 1.0322 63/ 64 .9844 1-5/ 32 1.1562
12 1. 1250 1.0167 1.0709 1-3/ 64 1.0469 1-5/ 32 1. 1562
1-1 / 4 7 1.2500 1.0644 1. 1572 1-7/ 64 1.1094 1-9/ 32 1. 2812
12 1.2500 1.1417 1. 1959 1-11 / 64 1.1719 1-9/ 32 1. 2812
1-1 / 2 6 1.5000 1.2835 1. 3917 1-1 1132 1.3437 1-17 / 32 1.5312
12 1.5000 1.3917 1.4459 1-27/ 64 1.4219 1-17/ 32 1.5312

226
 Reference Section

SCREW THREAD ELEMENTS FOR UNIFIED AND NATIONAL FORM OF THREAD

83 1/ 3 PERCENT
SINGLE HEIGHT DOUBLE HEIGHT DOUBLE HEIGHT BASIC WIDTH CONSTANT FOR
OF CREST BEST SIZE WIRE DI AMETER
THREADS PITCH
(p) SUBTRACT FROM SUBTRACT FROM SUBTRACT FROM AND ROOT ALSO OF
PER
BASIC MAJOR BASIC MAJOR BASIC MAJOR FLAT SINGLE HE I GHT BE ST SIZE
INCH 1
p =- DIAMETER TO GET p OF 60 DEG . WIRE
(n ) n DIAMETER TO DIAMETER TO
GET BASIC GET BASIC MINOR DIAMETER T V-THREAD
PITCH DIAMETER MINOR DIAMETER OF RING GAGE

3 .333333 .216506 .43301 .36084 .0417 .28868 . 19245

3 1/ 4 .307692 .199852 .39970 .33309 . 0385 .26647 .1 7765
3 1/ 2 .285714 .185577 .37115 . 30929 .0357 .24744 . 16496
4 .250000 .162379 .32476 .27063 .0312 .21651 .14434
4 112 . 222222 .144337 .28867 .24056 .0278 .19245 .12830

5 . 200000 . 129903 .25981 .21650 .0250 .17321 . 11547

5 1/2 .181818 . 118093 .23619 .19682 .0227 .15746 . 10497
6 .166666 .108253 .21651 . 18042 .02~ . 14434 .09623
7 .142857 .092788 . 18558 . 15465 .0179 . 12372 . 08248
8 .125000 .081189 . 16238 .13531 .0156 . 10825 .07217

9 .111111 .072168 .14434 . 12028 .0139 .09623 . 06415

10 . 100000 .064952 . 12990 .10825 .0125 .08660 .05774
11 .090909 .059046 .11809 .09841 .0114 .07873 .05249
11 1/ 2 .086956 .056480 .11296 .09413 .0109 .07531 .05020
12 .083333 .054127 .10826 .09021 .0104 .07217 .04811

13 .076923 .049963 .09993 .08327 .0096 .06662 .04441

14 .071428 .046394 .09279 .07732 .0089 .06186 .04124
16 .062500 . 040595 .08119 .06766 .0078 .05413 . 03608
18 .055555 .036086 .07217 . 06014 .0069 .04811 .03208
20 .050000 .032475 .06495 .05412 .0062 .04330 .02887

22 .045454 . 029523 .05905 .04920 .0057 .03936 .02624

24 .041666 .027063 .05413 .04510 .0052 .03608 .02406
27 .037037 .024056 .04811 .04009 .0046 .03208 .02 138
28 . 035714 .023197 .04639 .03866 .0045 . 03093 . 02062
30 .033333 .021651 .04330 .03608 .0042 . 02887 .01925

32 .031250 .020297 .04059 . 03383 .0039 .02706 .01 804

36 .027777 .018042 .03608 .03007 .0035 .02406 .01604
40 .025000 .016237 .03247 .02706 .0031 .02165 .01443
44 .022727 .014761 .02952 .02460 .0028 . 01968 .01312
48 .020833 .013531 .02706 .02255 .0026 .01804 .01203

50 .020000 .012990 .02598 .02165 .0025 .0173 2 .01155

56 .017857 .011598 .02320 .01933 .0022 .01546 .0 1031
60 .016666 .010825 .02165 .01804 .0021 .01443 .00962
64 .015625 .010148 .02030 .01691 .0020 .01353 .00902
72 .013888 .009021 .01804 .01503 .0017 .01203 .00802

80 .012500 .008118 .01624 .01353 .0016 .01083 .00722

90 .011111 .007217 .01443 .01202 .0014 .00962 .00642
96 .010417 .006766 .01353 .01127 .0013 .00902 .00601
100 .010000 .006495 .01299 .01082 .0012 .00866 .00577
120 .008333 .005413 .01083 .00902 .0010 .00722 .00481

Us ing the Ses t Si z.e Wi res , the measur e ment over three wires m inus th e Co ns ta n t fo r Sest Si ze Wir e equo ls the P i tch Diam ete,.

227
 Machine Trades Print Reading

MACHINE SCREW AND CAP SCREW HEADS

SIZE A B c D
#8 .260 .141 .042 .060
~~ #10 .302 . 164 .048 .072
o J l-l-~ 1/ 4
5/ 16
3/ 8
7/ 16
.205
.242
.064
.077
.087
. 102
3/ 8
h
I I
1/ 2
9/ 16
3/ 4
.300
.394
.086
. 102
. 125
.168
5/ 8
FILLISTER HEAD
I i 3/ 4
7/ 8
1
.500
.590
.128
.144
.215
.258
IbJ 1 1 5/ 16 .774 .182 .352

L ~ #8 .320 .092 .043 .037

,, 0] 0
r--

hI I
-r
B #10
1/ 4
5/ 16
3/ 8
1/ 2
.372
112
5/ 8
3/ 4
7/ 8
.107
.146
.183
.220
.220
.048
.064
.072
.081
.044
.063
.078
.095
I I .102 .090
FLAT HEAD I I 5/ 8 1 1/ 8 .293 .128 .125
W 3/ 4 1 3/ 8 .366 . 144 .153

L-~
,,0]
#8 .297 .113 .044 .067
#10 .346 . 130 .048 .073
oJ I 1/ 4 7/ 16 . 1831 .064 . 107
ir----. 5/ 16 9/ 16 .236 .072 . 150
I I
I I 3/ 8 5/ 8 .262 .081 . 160
I I 1/ 2 13/ 16 .340 . 102 .200
ROUND HEAD I I
W 5/ 8
3/ 4
1
1 1/ 4
.422
.526
.128
. 144
.255
.320

OJ ~ I
114
5/ 16
3/ 8
.494
.564
.635
.170
.215
.246
7/ 16
112
9/ 16

HEXAGON HEAD
n
I I
1/ 2
5/ 8
3/ 4
.846
1.058
1.270
.333
.411
.490
3/ 4
15/ 16
1 118
I I 7/ 8 1.482 .566 1 5/ 16
bd 1 1.693 .640 1 1/ 2

#8 .265 .164 118

11 #10 5/ 16 .190 5/ 32

~
IL.l..J
I I 1/ 4 3/ 8 1/ 4 3/ 16
---1 5/ 16 7/ 16 5/ 16 7/32
c ~
3/ 8 9/ 16 3/ 8 5/ 16
~
I I
7/ 16 5/ 8 7/ 16 5/ 16
I I 1/ 2 3/ 4 112 3/ 8
SOCKET HEAD I I
I I 5/ 8 7/ 8 5/ 8 112
ld 3/ 4
7/ 8
1
1 1/ 8
3/ 4
7/ 8
9/ 16
9/ 16
1 1 5/ 16 1 5/ 8

228
 CONVERSION CHART
Drill No . Drill No . Drill No . Drill No .
Drill No .
Inch mm or Letter Inch mm or Letter Inch mm or Letter Inch mm or Letter Inch mm
or Letter
.001 .101 2 .5654 7 .201 5 .1054 .301 7 .6454 .401 10 .1854
0 .0254
.002 38 .1015 .102 2 .5908 .202 5 .1308 N .302 7 .6708 .402 10.2108
0 .0508
.003 0 .0762 .103 2 .6162 .203 5 .1562 .303 7 .6962 .403 10.2362
.004 17 .104 2 .6416 13 / 64 .2031 5 .1594 .304 7 .7216 Y .404 10.2616
0 .1016
.005 0 .1270 .105 2 .6670 6 .204 5 .1816 .305 7 .7470 .405 10.2870
.006 0 .1524 36 .1065 .106 2 .6924 5 .2055 .205 5 .2070 .306 7 .7724 .406 10.3124
.007 0 .1778 .107 2 .7178 .206 5 .2324 .307 7 .7978 13 / 32 .4062 10.3187
.008 0 .2032 .108 2 .7432 .207 5 .2578 .308 7 .8232 .407 10.3378
.009 0 .2286 .109 2 .7686 .208 5.2832 .309 7 .8486 .408 10.3632
.010 0 .2540 7 /64 .1094 2 .7781 4 .209 5 .3086 .310 7 .8740 .409 10.3886
.011 0 .2794 35 .110 2 .7490 .210 5 .3340 .311 7.8994 .4 10 10.4140
.012 0 .3048 34 .11 1 2 .8194 .211 5 .3594 .312 7.9248 .411 10.4394
.013 0 .3302 .112 2 .8448 .212 5 .3848 5 / 16 .3125 7.9375 .4 12 10.4648
80 .0135 .014 0 .3556 33 .113 2 .8702 3 .213 5.4102 .313 7 .9502 Z .413 10.4902
79 .0145 .015 0 .3810 .114 2 .8956 .214 5.4356 .314 7 .9756 .414 10.5156
1/ 64 .0156 0 .3969 .115 2 .9210 .215 5.4610 .3150 8 .0000 .4 15 10.5410
78 .016 0.4064 32 .116 2 .9464 .216 5 .4864 .315 8 .0010 .416 10.5664
.017 0.4318 .117 2 .9718 .217 5 .5118 0 .316 8 .0264 .417 10.5918
77 .018 0.4572 .118 2 .9972 .218 5 .5372 .317 8 .0518 .418 10.6172
.019 0 .4826 .1181 3 .0000 7 / 32 .2187 5 .5562 .318 8 .0772 .419 10.6426
76 .020 0 .5080 .119 3 .0226 .219 5 .5626 .319 8 .1026 .420 10 .6680
75 .021 0 .5334 31 .120 3.0480 .220 5 .5880 .320 8 .1280 .421 10.6934
.022 0.5588 .121 3.0734 2 .221 5 .6134 .321 8 .1534 27 / 64 .4219 10 .7156
74 .0225 .023 0 .5842 .122 3.0988 .222 5 .6388 .322 8 .1788 .422 10.7188
73 .024 0 .6096 .123 3 .1242 .223 5 .6642 P .323 8 .2042 .42 3 10.744 2
72 .025 0 .6350 .124 3 .1496 .224 5 .6896 .324 8 .2296 .4 24 10.7696
71 .026 0 .6604 1/6 .125 3 .1750 .225 5 .7150 .325 8 .2550 .425 10.7950
.027 0 .6858 .126 3.2004 .226 5 .7404 .326 8 .2804 .42 6 10.8204
70 .028 0 .7112 .127 3 .2258 .227 5 .7658 .327 8 .3058 427 10.8458
.029 0 .7366 .128 3 .2512 1 .228 5 .7912 .328 8 .3312 .428 10 .871 2
69 .0292 .030 0 .7620 30 .1285 .129 3.2766 .229 5 .8166 21 /64 .3281 8 .3344 .429 10.8966
68 .031 0 .7874 .130 3 .3020 .230 5 .8410 .329 8 .3566 .430 10.9220
1 / 32 .0312 0 .7937 .131 3.3274 .231 5 .8674 .330 8 .3820 .431 10 .9474
67 .032 0 .8128 .132 3 .3528 .232 5 .8928 .331 8.4074 .432 10.9728
66 .033 0 .8382 .133 3 .3782 .233 5 .9182 0 .332 8.4328 .433 10 .9982
.034 0 .8636 .134 3.4036 A .234 5 .9436 .333 8 .4582 .4331 11 .0000
65 .035 0 .8890 .135 3.4290 15 / 64 .2344 5 .9531 .334 8 .4836 .434 11 .0236
64 .036 0 .9144 29 .136 3.4544 .235 5 .9690 .335 8 .5090 4 35 11 .0490
63 .037 0 .9398 .137 3.4798 .236 5 .9944 .336 8 .5344 .436 11.0744
62 .038 0.9652 .138 3 .5052 .2362 6 .0000 .337 8 .5598 .43 7 11 .0998
61 .039 0 .9906 .139 3.5306 .237 6.0198 .338 8.5852 7116 .4375 11.1125
.0394 1.0000 28 .1405 .140 3 .5560 B .238 6.0452 R .339 8 .S106 .438 1 1.1252
60 .040 1.0160 9 /64 .1406 3 .5719 .239 6.0706 .340 8 .6360 .439 11 .1506
59 .041 1.0414 .141 3 .5814 .240 6.0960 .341 8 .6614 .440 11. 1760
58 .042 1.0668 .142 3 .6068 .241 6.1214 .342 8 .6868 .441 11 .201 4
57 .043 1.0922 .143 3.6322 C .242 6 .1468 .343 8 .7122 .442 11 2268
.044 1.1176 27 .144 3.6576 .243 6 .1722 11 / 32 .3437 8 .7312 .443 11 .2522
.045 1. 1430 .145 3.6830 .244 6 .1976 .344 8 .7376 .444 11 .2776
56 .0465 .046 1.1684 .146 3 .7084 .245 6 .2230 .345 8 .7630 .445 11 .3030
3 / 64 .0469 1.1906 26 .147 3.7338 0 .246 6 .2484 .346 8 .7884 .446 11 .3284
.047 1.1938 .148 3.7592 .247 6 .2738 .347 8 .8138 .447 11 .3538
.048 1.2192 .149 3.7846 .248 6.2992 S .348 8 .8392 .448 11 .3792
25 .1495 3 .8100
.049 1.2446 .150 .249 6.3246 .349 8 .8646 .449 11.4046
.050 1.2700 .151 3 .8354 E 1/4 .250 6 .3500 .350 8 .8900 .450 11.4300
.051 1.2954 24 .152 3 .8608 .251 6 .3754 .351 8 .9154 .451 11.4554
55 .052 1.3208 153 3 .8862 .252 6 .4008 .352 8 .9408 .452 11 .4808
.053 1.3462 23 .154 3 .9116 .253 6.4262 .353 8 .9662 .453 11 .5062
.054 1.3716 .155 3 .9370 .254 6.4516 .354 8 .9916 29 / 64 .4531 11 .5094
54 .055 1.3970 .156 3 .9624 .255 6.4770 .3543 9 .0000 .454 11.5316
.056 1.4224 5 / 32 .1562 3.9687 .256 6 .5024 .355 9 .0170 .455 11 .5570
.057 1.4478 22 .157 3.9878 F .257 6 .5278 .356 9 .0424 .456 11 .5824
.058 1.4732 .1575 4 .0000 .258 6.5532 .357 9 .0678 .457 11 .6078
.059 1.4986 .158 4 .0132 .259 6 .5786 T .358 9 .0932 .458 11 .6332
53 .0595 1.5240 21 .159 4 .0386 .260 6 .6040 .359 9 .1186 .459 11.6586
.060
.061 1.5494 .160 4 .0640 G .261 6 .6294 23 / 64 .3594 9 .1281 .460 11 .6840
.062 1.5748 20 .161 4 .0894 .262 6 .6548 .360 9 .1440 .461 11 .7094
1116 .0625 1.5875 .162 4 .1148 .263 6 .6802 .361 9 .1694 .462 11 .7348
.063 1.6002 .163 4 .1402 .264 6.7056 .362 9 .1948 .463 11 .7602
52 .0635 .064 1.6256 .164 4 .1656 .265 6 .7310 .363 9 .2202 .464 11.7856
.065 1.6510 .165 4 .1910 17 /64 .2656 6 .7469 .364 9 .2456 .465 11.8110
.066 1.6764 19 .166 4 .2164 H .266 6 .7564 .365 9 .2710 .466 11 .8364
51 .067 1.7018 .167 4 .2418 .267 6 .7818 .366 9 .2964 .467 11 .8618
.068 1.7272 .168 4 .2672 .268 6 .8072 .367 9 .3218 .468 11 .8872
.069 1.7526 .169 4 .2926 .269 6 .8326 U .368 9 .3472 15 / 32 .4687 11 .9062
50 .070 1.7780 18 .1635 .170 4 .3180 .270 6 .8580 .369 9 .3726 .469 11.9126
.071 1.8034 .171 4 .3434 .271 6 .8834 .370 9 .3980 .470 11 .9380
.072 1.8288 11 / 64 .1719 4 .3656 I .272 6 .9088 .371 9 .4234 .471 11 .9634
49 .073 1.8542 .172 4 .3688 .273 6 .9342 .372 9 .4488 .472 11 .9888
.074 1.8796 17 .173 4 .3942 .274 6 .9596 .373 9.4742 .4724 12.0000
.075 1.9050 .174 4.4196 .275 6 .9850 .374 9 .4996 .473 12.0142
48 .071i 1.9304 .175 4.4450 .2756 7 .0000 3 /8 .375 9 .5250 .474 12.0396
.077 1.9558 .176 4.4704 .276 7 .0104 .376 9 .5504 .475 12.0650
47 .0785 .078 1.9812 16 .177 4 .4958 J .277 7 .0358 V .377 9 .5758 .476 12.0904
5/64 .0781 1.9844 .178 4.5212 .278 7 .0612 .378 9 .6012 .477 12 .1158
.0787 2 .0000 .179 4 .5466 .279 7 .0866 .379 9 .6266 .478 12 .1412
.079 2 .0066 15 .180 4 .5720 .280 7 .1120 .380 9 .6520 .479 12 .1666
.080 2 .0320 .181 4 .5974 K .281 7 .1374 .381 9 .6774 .480 12 .1920
46 .081 2 .0574 14 .182 4 .6228 9 / 32 .2812 7.1437 .382 9 .7028 .481 12 .2174
45 .082 2 .0828 .183 4 .6482 .282 7 .1628 .383 9 .7282 .482 12 .2428
.083 2 .1082 .184 4 .6736 .283 7.1882 .384 9 .7536 .483 12 .2682
.084 2 .1336 13 .185 4 .6990 .284 7 .2136 .385 9 .7790 .484 12 .2936
.085 2 .1590 .186 4 .7244 .285 7 .2390 W .386 9 .8044 31 /64 .4844 12.3031
44 .086 2 .1844 .187 4 .7498 .286 7 .2644 .387 9 .8298 .485 12 .3190
.087 2 .2098 3 / 16 .1875 4 .7625 .287 7 .2898 .388 9 .8552 .486 12.3444
.088 2 .2352 .188 4 .7752 .288 7 .3152 .389 9 .8806 .487 12.3698
43 .089 2 .2606 12 .189 4 .8006 .289 7 .3406 .390 9 .9060 .488 12.3952
.090 2.2860 .190 4 .8260 L .290 7 .3660 25 /64 .3906 9 .9219 .489 12.4206
.091 2 .3114 11 .191 4 .8514 .291 7 .3914 .391 9.9314 .490 12.4460
.092 2 .3368 .192 4 .8768 .292 7.4168 .392 9 .9568 .491 12 .4714
42 .0935 .093 2 .3622 .193 4 .9022 .293 7 .4422 .393 9.9822 .492 12.4968
3 / 32 .0937 2 .3812 10 .1935 .194 4 .9276 .294 7.4676 .3937 10.0000 .493 12.5222
.094 2 .3876 .195 4 .9530 M .295 7.4930 .394 10.0076 .494 12.5476
.095 2 .4130 9 .196 4 .9784 .296 7 .5184 .395 10.0330 .495 12.5730
41 .096 2 .4384 .1969 5 .0000 19 /64 .2969 7 .5406 .396 10.0584 .496 12.5984
.097 2.4638 .197 5 .0038 .297 7 .5438 X .397 10.0838 .497 12.6238
40 .098 2 .4892 .198 5 .0292 .298 7 .5692 .398 10.1092 .498 12.6492
.099 2 .5146 .199 5 .0546 .299 7 .5946 .399 10.1346 .499 126746
39 .0995 .100 2 .5400 8 .200 5 .0800 .300 7 .6200 .400 10.1600 1/2 .500 12.7000
 Machine Trades Print Reading

STEEL NUMBERING SYSTEM

The Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) has standardized a numbering system for steel identifica-
tion . Each steel is assigned a four- or five-digit numerical name. The first two digits identify the key alloys
added to the steel. (ALLOYS are other metals added to the steel to change its properties, such as
strength or hardness.) The last two digits (shown as XX in the chart) identify the carbon percentage of the
steel , in hundredths of a percent. For example, 1040 steel is a plain carbon steel (no other alloys) with a
0.40% carbon content. In general , the higher the carbon content, the stronger and more brittle the steel.

Numerical Numerical
Name Key Alloys Name Key Alloys

10XX Carbon only (plain carbon) 501XX Chromium

11XX Carbon only (free-cutting) 511XX Chromium
13XX Manganese 521XX Chromium
23XX Nickel 514XX Chromium
25XX Nickel 515XX Chromium
31XX Nickel-Chromium 61XX Vanadium
33XX Nickel-Chromium 81XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
303XX Nickel-Chromium 86XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
40XX Molybdenum 87XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
41XX Chromium-Molybdenum 88XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
43XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum 92XX Silicon-Manganese
44XX Manganese-Molybdenum 93XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
46XX Nickel-Molybdenum 94XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-
Manganese
47XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
98XX Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
48XX Nickel-Molybdenum
XXBXX Boron
50XX Chromium
XXLXX Lead
51XX Chromium

230
 Reference Section

TABLE OF CUTTING SPEEDS

Feet
per 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Min.

Diam-
eter REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE
Inches

1/16 1833 2445 3056 3667 4278 4889 5500 6111 6722 7334 7945 8556 9167
1/8 917 1222 1528 1833 2139 2445 2750 3056 3361 3667 3973 4278 4584
3/16 611 815 1019 1222 1426 1630 1833 2037 2241 2445 2648 2852 3056
1/4 458 611 764 917 1070 1222 1375 1528 1681 1833 1986 2139 2292
5/16 367 489 611 733 856 978 1100 1222 1345 1467 1589 1711 1833
3/1', 306 407 509 611 713 815 917 1019 1120 1222 1324 1426 1528
7/16 262 349 437 524 611 698 786 873 960 1048 1135 1222 1310
1/2 229 3!Xl 382 45X 535 611 ()Hg 764 1',40 917 993 1070 1146
5/8 183 244 306 367 42l:l 489 550 611 672 733 794 856 917
3/4 153 203 255 306 357 ~)7 451', 509 560 611 662 713 764
7/8 131 175 218 262 306 349 393 436 480 524 568 611 655
1 115 153 191 229 267 306 344 382 420 458 497 535 573
1-1/8 102 136 170 204 231', 272 306 340 373 407 441 475 509
1-1/4 92 122 153 183 214 244 275 306 336 ~67 397 428 458
1-3/8 83 111 139 167 194 222 250 278 306 333 361 389 417
1-1/2 76 102 127 153 17l:l 204 229 255 280 306 331 357 382
l-s/M 70 94 117 141 165 IH8 212 235 259 282 306 329 353
1-3/4 65 87 109 131 153 175 196 218 240 262 2H4 306 327
1-7/1', 61 81 102 122 143 163 183 204 224 244 265 285 306
2 57 76 95 115 134 153 172 191 210 229 248 267 287
2-1/4 51 68 85 102 119 136 153 170 187 204 221 238 255
2-1 /2 46 61 76 92 107 122 137 153 168 183 199 214 229
2-3/4 42 56 69 83 97 III 125 139 153 167 181 194 208
3 38 51 64 76 89 102 115 127 140 153 166 178 191

STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS USED IN DRAWINGS

A B/ M I Bill of Material CI I Cast Iron

ADD / Addendum BEV I Bevel CIR I Circu lar
ADJ / Adjust BHN I Brinnel Hardness Number CIRC I Circumfe rence
ALIGN / Alignment BNH I Burnish CL I Clearance
ALLOW / Allowance BRG I Bearing CONC I Concent ric
AL T / Alteration BRKT I Bracket COND / Conditi on
ALUM I Aluminum BRS I Brass CONT I Control
ALY I Alloy BRZ I Br::>nze COP / Coppe r
ANL / Anneal BRZG / Brazing CPLG / Coupling
ANOD / Anodize BUSH / Bushing CR VAN I Chrome Vanad ium
APPD I Approved CRS / Cold-Rolled Steel
APPROX I Approximate C CSTG I Casting
ASSY I Assembly CTD I Coated
C t o C I Center to Center
AUTO I Automatic CTR I Cent er
C' BORE I Counterbore
AUX I Auxiliary CTR I Contour
C'SINK / Countersink
AWG I I American Wire Gage CYL I Cylinder
CARB I Carburize
CDS I Cold-D rawn Steel
B CH I Case Harden
o
BC I Bolt Circle CHAM I Chamfer OAT I Datu m

231
 Machine Trades Print Reading

DCN / Drawing Change Notice K REQD / Required

OF / Drop Forge
REV / Revision
DIA / Diameter KWY / Keyway
RH / Right Hand
DIAG / Diagonal
RH / Rockwell Hardness
DIM / Dimension L RIV / Rivet
DR / Drill
DWG / Drawing LAM / Laminate
DWL/ Dowel LC / Low Carbon s
LG / Length
LH / Left Hand SCH / Schedule
E SCR / Screw
SECT / Section
EA / Each M SEQ / Sequence
ECC / Eccentric
MACH / Machine SERR / Serrate
ECO / Engineering Change Order
MAG / Magnesium SF / Spotface
ECR / Engineering Change
MATL / Material SH / Sheet
Revision
MAX / Maximum SPEC / Specification
EQ / Equal
MCR / Manufacturing Change SPL / Special
EQUIV / Equivalent
Revision SQ / Square
ES / Engineering Specifications
MECH / Mechanical SST / Stainless Steel
EST / Estimate
MI / Malleable Iron STD / Standard
MIL / Military STK / Stock
F MIN / Minimum STL / Steel
MISC / Miscellaneous SYM / Symmetrical
FAS / Fabricate
MOD / Modification
FAO / Finish All Over
MTG / Mounting T
FIL / Fillet
FIM / Full Indicator Movement
N TAP / Tapping
FIN / Finish
TEM /Temper
FLG / Flange
NO. / Number THO / Thread
FORG / Forging
NOM / Nominal THK /Thick
FST / Forged Steel
NORM / Normalize TIF / True Involute Form
FTG / Fitting
NS / Nickel Steel TIR / Total Indicator Reading
FURN / Furnish
NTS / Not to Scale TOL / Tolerance
TS / Tensile Strength
G o TS / Tool Steel
TYP / Typical
GA / Gage OSS / Obsolete
GALV / Galvanized 00 / Outside Diameter
GRD / Grind U
GSKT / Gasket
p UNC / Unified Screw Thread
Coarse
H P / Pitch UHF / Unified Screw Thread
PC / Piece Fine
HCS / High Carbon Steel PROC / Process
HDN / Harden
HEX / Hexagon Q
v
HOR / Horizontal
HS / High Speed QTY / Quantity VAR / Variable
HSG / Housing QUAL / Quality VERT / Vertical
HT TR / Heat Treat
R w
R / Radius W /Width
ID / Inside Diameter RD / Round WI/Wrought Iron
INSTL / Installation REF / Reference WT /Weight

232
 +
:I
GLOSSARY
, ,
A Chamfer: A bevel placed on a circular piece or
Angular Measurement: Technique used to
define the size of an angle as a fraction of a full cir-
cle (360°).
Assembly Drawing: A drawing that shows how
different parts are connected to form an assembly.
B Counterbore: To enlarge the end of a hole
Basic Dimension: A numeric value stating the
exact size, contours, orientation , or position of a
feature or datum.
Bevel: An angled surface on the edge of an
object. Normally used to eliminate sharp corners.
See Chamfer.
Bill of Materials: See Materials List.
Blind Hole: A hole drilled to a specific depth
that is less than the thickness of the part being
drilled.
Blueprint: Originally, a copy of a drawing with
white lines against a blue background. Actual blue-
prints are no longer used , but the term is still used
interchangeably with the term print.
Board Drafting: See Hand Drafting.
Bore: To enlarge a hole to close tolerance and
fine finish. A bored hole is more accurate than a
drilled hole, but less accurate than a reamed hole.
Boss: A raised cylindrical surface on a casting,
which provides additional material on the part. A
cylindrical pad .
Break Line: A line used to separate a broken-
out section from the otherwise normal view.
Broken-Out Section: A sectional view con-
tained within another view, separated by a break
line. Used when only a small portion of the view
must be shown in sectional form .
c Drawing Revisions: Changes made to a draw-
CAD (Computer-Aided Drafting): Creating a
drawing using a computer.
233
part.
Change Block: See Revision Block.
Central Processing Unit (CPU): The portion of
a computer system that stores information and
analyzes data.
Contour: The outline of an object, especially
curved or irregular-shaped outlines.
cylindrically to a specified depth . Normally used to
provide recess for a fastener head or a bearing
seat.
Countersink: To enlarge the end of a hole con-
ically. Normally used to allow recess for a flat-head
screw.
Cutting Plane: An imaginary plane that divides
an object to produce a sectional view.
D
Datum: Exact point, axis, or plane serving as
the origin from which location or geometric char-
acteristics of features of a part are derived .
Datum Feature: A feature used as a datum.
Datum Line: A line used as a reference
point.
Datum Symbol: A symbol including an identifi-
cation letter and an equilateral triangle used to
identify a datum feature.
Diazo Process: A method of producing prints
using a photochemical process, in which light-sen-
sitive paper is exposed and then developed with
ammonia vapor.
Dimension: A distance between two points
on a part or a measurement of a feature of a
part.
Drawing Number: Unique number assigned to
a drawing for identification purposes.
ing after it is completed .
Dual Dimensioning: Dimensioning an object in
both U.S. conventional and SI metric units.
 Machine Trades Print Reading
E Line Usage: A universally-accepted method of
Engineering Copier: A device used to create
prints using an electrostatic process.
F
Feature: Universal term applied to a portion of
a part, such as a surface, hole, thread , or groove.
Feature Control Symbol: A rectangular frame
containing the symbol for the type of tolerance and
the numeric value of the tolerance. A datum refer-
ence may also be included.
Flat: A depression on a shaft or shank providing
a seat for a setscrew.
Foreshortened: Contracted in the direction of
depth .
Full Section: A sectional view in which the
entire object has been cut.
G Mouse: An input device used with a compute r
Geometric Tolerancing: Specifying allowable
variation from exact shape or position.
Groove: A recess on the interior surface of a
cyl indrical piece (internal groove). Also, used inter-
changeably with neck (external groove).
H
Half Section: A view in which one-half of an
object is shown normally and the other half is
shown as if cut for a sectional view. Normally used
on symmetrical objects.
Hand Drafting: Creating a drawing using pencil
and other drafting tools, including triangles, com-
pass, and templates . Also called board drafting.
K
Keyseat: An external groove machined along
the length of a shaft providing a seat for a key.
Keyway: An internal groove machined along the
length of a hole providing a slot for a key.
L part for identification purposes.
Least Material Condition (LMC): Condition
using the limits resulting in the minimum amount
of material remaining on the part. This is the
upper limit for internal features (such as holes)
and the lower limit for external features (such as
shafts) .
Limits: Maximum and minimum allowable size
for a dimension.
234
using specific line weights and patterns to repre-
sent unique features.
M
Machine Drawing: A drawing that details a sin-
gle part. Also called a part drawing.
Materials List: A list of all individual pieces
needed to create the part detailed in the drawing .
Also called parts list or bill of materials.
Maximum Material Condition (MMC):
Condition using the limit resulting in the maximum
amount of material remaining on the part. This is
the lower limit for internal features (such as holes)
and the upper limit for external features (such as
shafts) .
Modem: A device that allows computers to
transmit information between one another through
telephone lines.
that controls the location of the on-screen cursor.
Multiview Drawing: A drawing that provides a
means of visualizing a three-dimensional object
through the use of two-dimensional views. For
most objects, three views are usually sufficient.
N
Neck: A recess in the outer edge of a cylindrical
workpiece used to allow surfaces of mating pieces
to fit flush to each other.
o
Orthographic Projection: A multiview drawing
using perpendicular projectors to show various
views of an object.
p
Pad: A raised surface on a casting identical to a
boss, but in a shape other than cylindrical.
Part Drawing: See Machine Drawing.
Part Number: Unique number assigned to a
Parts List: See Materials List.
Pictorial Drawing: Three-dimensional likeness
of an object.
Pitch: Distance between consecutive crests on
a threaded part. The pitch may also be expressed
as the number of threads per inch.
Plotter: A device used with CAD systems that
transfers the drawing from the computer onto
paper.
 Glossary
Print: A copy of an original drawing .
Projectors: Lines that connect common points
between different views of a multiview drawing.
Puck: An input device used with CAD systems.
The puck is used to position the on-screen cursor
and select commands from a tablet.
R Taper: Conical surface on a shaft or in a hole.
Ream: To enlarge the interior of a hole to a
specific size and fin ish .
Regardless of Feature Size: A tolerance zone
that remains constant, regardless of the actual
size of the feature.
Removed Section: A sectional view similar to a
revolved section but shown separately from the
view in which the cutting-plane line is shown.
Revision Block: Record of changes made to a
drawing . Also called change block.
Revolved Section: A sectional view showing a
cross section of the object. A revolved section is
shown within another view.
s
Scale: The ratio between the size of an object in
a drawing and its actual size.
Sectional View: A view of an object as it would
appear if cut by an imaginary plane.
Section Lines: Cross-hatching used to repre-
sent material "cut" by the cutting plane in a sec-
tional view.
Slot: A feature machined into a piece that
serves as the female part of a connection to anoth-
er piece. Common slots include tee slots and dove-
tail slots.
Spotface: To provide a smooth , flat surface
around a hole. Identical to a counterbore except
much more shallow.
235
T
Tablet: An input device used with CAD systems.
The tablet has a large, flat surface on wh ich a puck
is positioned to select commands and move the
on-screen cursor.
Tap: To machine an internal thread in a hole .
Through Hole: A hole drilled through the enti re
thickness of the material.
Title Block: Boxed area normally located in the
lower-right corner of a drawing where general
information is provided.
Tolerance: Total amount that a dimension is
allowed to vary. The difference between maximum
and minimum limits.
Tolerance Block: Boxed area on a drawing that
contains the allowable variations of machined
dimensions.
TPI: Taper per inch.
TPF: Taper per foot.
v
Vertex: The point at which two angle-forming
lines converge.
V-Groove: A V-shaped groove, normally found
on pulleys used with V-belts .
w
Working Drawing: A drawing that provides all
of the details needed to completely describe an
object, including dimensions, tolerances , and cor-
rect views.
 - "
~
J

r
I
t ttl1

A Bilateral tolerances, 45
Adapter (print) and quiz, 216-217 Blade clamp (print) and quiz, 58-59
Adapter plate (print) and quiz, 74-75 Blend radius, 91
Adjusting bolt (print) and quiz, 88-89 Blind holes, 65
Adjusting bracket (print) and quiz, 25-26 Block style, title block, 29
Adjusting hanger bracket (print) and quiz, 142-143 Boring, 66
Alphabet of lines, 16 Bosses and pads, 149
American National Standard Y14.5M- Break lines, 18
Dimensioning and Tolerancing , 166 Broken-out section, 107-108
American Society of Mechanical Engineers By symbol , 64
(ASME), 16
C
Angles, 128-143
bevel , 131 CAGE code, 30
chamfers, 128-129 Cap-eye end (print) and quiz, 116-117
dimensioning, 131 Centerline, 17
tapers , 129-131 Chamfer, 128-129
taper calculations, 130-131 Chart-dowel-split type (print) and quiz, 132-133
Angle of projection block, 32 Checked by, 32
Angular dimensions, 40-41 , 131 Circle, 90
Angular measurement, 40-41 , 131 Circular runout, 183, 185
Angular tolerances, 46 Circularity, 171-172
Angularity, 176-177 Circumference, 90
Annular grooves, 144-145 Clamping collar (print) and quiz, 100-101
Appl ication block, 34 Clevis bracket (print) and quiz, 27-28
NEXT ASSY, 34 Clevis-lower (print) and quiz, 194-195
USED ON , 34 Coarse threads, 76
Approved by, 32 Company information, 29
Arcs, 90 Concentricity, 183
ASME Y14.1-2005, 29 Constant pitch threads, 76
ASME Y14.2M-1992, 16 Contours, 90-101
ASME Y14.5-2009 Dimensioning and arcs, 90
Tolerancing , 64 fillets, 91
other, 92
B rounds, 91-92
Basic dimensions, 9 Coordinate tolerancing , 177
Basic size, 43 Cord set housing (print) and quiz, 93
Bearing block, 51-52 Core bit ext. blank (print) and quiz, 158-159
Bearing plate (print) and quiz, 98-99 Counterbore symbol, 68
Bearing support block (print) and quiz, 80-81 Counterboring , 68, 167
Bevel, 131 Counterdrilling, 67
Countersinking, 67-68, 167
236
 Index

Countersink symbol, 68 Drawn by, 32

Counterweight-main (print) and quiz, 200-201 Drill,65
Cover plate (print) and quiz, 154-155 Drilled hole, 64-65
Cutting plane, 102 Drilling , 64-65
Cutting-plane lines, 18, 103 Drill stand handle (print) and quiz, 126-127
Cylindricity, 172-173 Drive pulley (print) and quiz, 152-153
Dual dimensions, 41
D
E
Date, 32
Datum , 42, 166, 169 Eccentric collar (print) and quiz, 70-71
Datum axis, 170-171 Endcap (print) and quiz, 212-213
Datum feature, 166 Extension lines, 17
Datum features, 169 External grooves, 145
Datum feature symbol, 168 Extra-fine threads , 76
Datum plane/datum surface, 169-170
Datum planes, 169 F
Datum point, 170-171 Fan housing spacer (print) and quiz, 206-207
Datums, 169-170 Feature, 32, 166
datum axis, 170-171 Feature control symbol , 168
datum plane/datum surface, 169-170 Feature control symbol using datum references ,
datum targets, 170 168-169
Datum surfaces, 169 Fillet, 91
Datum surfaces and features, 169 Fillets and rounds, 91-92
Datum symbol, 168 Fine threads, 76
Datum targets , 170 First-angle projection, 6, 8
Decimal inch dimensions, 39 Flatness, 174
Decimal tolerances, 45 Flats, 147, 149
Degree, 40 Foreshortening, 10
Depth , 167-168 Forged bodyshop hammer (print) and quiz,
Depth adjustment plate (print) and quiz, 156-157 210-211
Depth symbol , 64 Forged splitting chisel (print) and quiz, 214-215
Diameter, 90, 167 Fork, 53
Diameter symbol , 64 Form , 166
Dimension , 39 Form tolerances, 171-174
Dimension lines, 17 circularity, 171-172
Dimensions and tolerances, 39-43 cylindricity, 172
angular, 40-41 flatness, 173-174
decimal inch, 39 roundness, 171
dual, 41 straightness, 172-173
fractional , 39-40 Fractional dimensions, 39-40
metric, 40 Fractional tolerances, 45
polar coordinate, 43
rectangular coordinate, 42-43 G
reference , 41
tabular, 42 Gasket (print) and quiz, 56-57
Direct tolerancing , 43 General notes, 34-35
Double yoke, 53 Geometric characteristic symbols (chart) , 167
Dovetail slots, 145-146 Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing , 166-201
Drawing format and title block quiz, 36 application, 166
Drawing formats, 29 datums, 169-171
Drawing number, 30 geometric symbols and their meaning, 171-187
Drawing problems, 13-15 geometric tolerance symbols, 167-169
Drawing standards, 16 standard symbols, 166-167
Drawing title, 30 terms, 166

237
 Machine Trades Print Reading

Geometric symbols, 171-187 L

form tolerances, 171-174
locational tolerances , 177-183 Leader line, 17
orientation tolerances, 176-177 Least material condition (LMC) , 177, 180-181
Limits, 44-45, 166
profile tolerances, 175-176
runout tolerance, 183-186 Limit tolerancing, 44-45
basic size, 43-44
Geometric tolerance symbols, 167-169
high , 44
datum feature symbol, 168
low, 44
feature control symbol, 168
nominal size, 39-40
feature control symbol using datum references,
single, 44
168-169
Line usage, 16-28
Geometric tolerancing , 166
break, 18
Geometric tolerancing quiz, 187
centerline, 17
Glass box, 5-8
cutting-plane, 18
Grooves, 144-146
dimension , 17
Guard retaining plate (print) and quiz, 122- 123
extension , 17
Gusset (print) and quiz, 62-63
hidden, 16
identification on a print, 18-19
H
leader, 17
Half sections, 106 line and surface identification , 20
Handle ring (print) and quiz, 96-97 line and surface identification quizzes, 22-28
Hidden line, 16 object, 16
High limit, 44 phantom, 18
Holes, 64-75 section, 17
blind, 65 symmetry, 17
bored, 66 visible, 16
counterbored , 68 Link arm (print) and quiz, 160-161
counterdrilled , 67 Local notes, 34-35
countersunk, 67-68 Locational, 166
drilled, 64 Locational tolerances, 166, 177, 179-183
reamed , 66 concentricity, 183
spotface hole, 69 symmetry, 183
through , 65 true position , 177-182
Housing (print) and quiz, 198-199 Lock button plate (print) and quiz, 37-38
Hub roller bearing (print) and quiz, 120- 121 Locking bolt (print) and quiz, 84-85
Hub-water pump pulley (print) and quiz, 204-205 Low limit, 44

M
Insulating bushing (print) and quiz, 190-191 Margin drawing number block, 30
Inter. gear blank (print) and quiz, 196- 197 Material description , 32
Inter. pinion blank (print) and quiz, 138-139, Material finish , 32
192-193 Material number, 32
Internal groove, 145 Maximum material cond ition (MMC) , 177, 180
ISO metric threads, 77 Metric dimensions, 40
Item, 34 Metric thread series, 78
Metric thread use, 78
J Metric tolerances , 46
Jaw-left (print) and quiz, 140-141 Motor mount (print) and quiz, 164-165
Multiview application, 11-12
K Multiview application , projecting the views, 11-12
Multiview drawing, 5-12
Keyway, 146 basic dimensions, 9
Keyways and keys eats , 146-149 surface representation , 10
views , 5-9

238
 Index

visualizing basic shapes, 11-12 Projectors, 5

Multiview representation, 5 Projecting the views , 11-12
Multiview working drawing, 189
R
N Radii , 90-91
Necks, 144-145 Radius, 90, 167
Necks, grooves, slots, keyways , keyseats , flats, Radius symbol , 91
bosses, and pads, 144-165 Reamed hole, 66-67
Next assy. , 34 Reamer, 66-67
Nominal size, 39-40 Reaming , 66-67
Notes, 34-35 Rear bracket (print) and quiz, 54-55
Rectangular coordinate dimensions, 42
o Reference dimensions , 41
Regardless of feature size (RFS), 177, 181-182
Object line, 16 Removed section, 106-107
One-view, working drawings, 50-51 Revision block, 31
Orientation, 166 Revision history block, 34
Orientation tolerances, 166, 176-178 approved, 34
angularity, 176 date, 34
parallelism, 176 description , 34
perpendicularity, 176 REV, 34
Orifice (print) and quiz, 224-225 zone, 34
Orthographic projection, 5 Revision status of sheets, 34
p
Revisions, 31
Revolved section, 106- 107
Parallelism, 176, 178 Rounds,91-92
Part number, 31 Roundness , 171-172
Parts list, 34 Runout, 166
description, 34 Runout tolerance, 166, 183-186
item, 34 circular runout, 183
material, 34 total , 184-186
part number, 34
quantity, 34 S
Perpendicularity, 176, 178
Scale block, 32
Phantom lines, 18 Section lines, 17, 102, 104
Pictorial drawing, 10 Sectional views, 102-127
Piston (print) and quiz, 118-119, 222-223
Sheet block, 32
Pivot lever (print) and quiz, 162-163
Sheet format, 29
Plate-wheel guard (print) and quiz, 94-95
Sheet size, 29
Plus and minus tolerances, 45 Shoe plate (print) and quiz, 72-73
bilateral, 45 Single limit, 44
unilateral, 45 Size, 30
Polar coordinate dimensioning , 43
Slots, 145-147
Positional tolerancing quiz, 188 Snap ring (print) and quiz, 48-49
Power steering pulley remover body (print) and
Socket uP" bayonet (print) and quiz, 218-219
quiz, 220-221 Specified tolerances , 45-46
Print reading review, 203 angular tolerances, 46
Profile (line) , 175 decimal tolerances, 45-46
Profile (surface) , 175-176 fractional tolerances, 45-46
Profile tolerances, 166, 175-176 metric tolerances , 46-47
line, 175 Spindle blank (print) and quiz, 60-61
profile (line) , 175 Spindle drive (print) and quiz, 208-209
profile (surface), 175-176 Spindle (print) and quiz, 150-151
surface, 175 Spotface symbol , 69

239
 Machine Trades Print Reading

Spotfacing , 69 Tolerance, 43, 166

Square, 167- 168 Tolerance block, 32-33
Standard symbols, 166-168 Tolerances, 43-47
Straightness, 172-174 bilateral, 45
Stylus, 203 direct, 43
Su rface finish , 32-33 form , 166, 171-174
Su rface representation , 10-11 limit, 44
Su rface texture, 32-33 locational , 166, 177, 179-183
Symmetry, 183-184 orientation , 166, 176- 178
Symmetry line, 17 positional , 188
profile, 166, 175-176
T runout, 166, 183-185
T-bolts, 145 specified angular, 46
"T"-stop screw body (print) and quiz, 86-87 specified decimal, 45
Tabular dimensions, 42 specified fractional , 45
Tangent, 91 specified metric, 46
unilateral, 45
Taper calculations , 130-131
unspecified , 47
Tapered rivet (print) and quiz, 134-135
Tooth anchor chuck (print) and quiz, 136-137
Tapers, 129-130
Total runout, 184-186
Tapped holes, 77
True position, 177-182
Tee slots, 145, 147
True size and shape, 10
Terms, 166
Turnout tolerance, total runout, 184
Third-angle projection, 5-7
Two-view, working drawings, 50-51
Thread designation, 78-79
Types of lines, 17
Thread forms , 76-77
N (American National) , 76-77
U
UN (Unified National) , 76-77
Thread representations , 77 Unilateral tolerances , 45
Threads, 76-89 Unspecified tolerances, 47
Thread series, 76 Used on , 34
Thread specifications, 77
Thread uses, 76 V
Three-view, working drawing , 51-53 V-groove, 145-146
Through holes, 64 Vacuum pad stud (print) and quiz, 82-83
Thru , 64 Vee block (print) and quiz, 23-24
Title block and notes, 29-38 Views ,
CAGE code, 30 arrangement, 5-9
checked by, 32 first-angle, 6, 8
company information , 29 glass box, 5-8
date, 32 multiview drawing, 5
drawing number, 30 projecting, 11-12
drawing title, 30 third-angle, 5-6
drawn by, 32 visualizing , 11
margin drawing number block, 30
Visible line, 16
material description , 32 Visualizing basic shapes, 11
material number, 32 Visualizing shapes, 5-12
notes, 34-35
part name, 34 W
part number, 32, 34
scale block, 32 Weight block, 32
size, 30 Wobble plate (print) and quiz, 124-125
Working drawings, 50-63
Working drawings-one-, two-, three-view, 50-53

240
Machine Trades Print Reading
With Machine Trades Print Reading, students develop the basic
skills required for visualizing and interpreting industrial prints. Stu-
dents start by developing fundamental skills and progress to details
encountered when working at a professional level. The final unit-
Print Reading Review- has comprehensive review quizzes that help
assess students' progress.

Features
• Combination text and workbook.
• Actual industrial prints used fo r the activities .
• New content for dimensions, tolerances , and orthographic
projections.
• Add itional illustrations reinfo rce instruction and develop student
skills.

Other Drafting, Manufacturing, and Metals Titles

from Goodheart-Willcox publisher
• Drafting and Design. Comprehensive text that teaches the
practices and techn iques used by drafters. Features instruction
in both manual (traditional) drafting and CAD.
• AutoCAD and Its Applications-Basics. Provides instruction
for masterin g AutoCAD commands, tools, and drawing and
dimensioning techniques.
• CNC Machining. Teaches the information and concepts to
help students progress from simple manual machining to
an efficient use of computer numerical control machining
equipment.
• Machining Fundamentals. Comprehensive text that provides
an introduction to the various machining operations, setups,
and proce ures. Cove rs traditional methods, new methods,
and nontraditional methods.

I
ISBN 978-1-6 1960-195-6

90000

9781619 601956